BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide

BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide

BioStar 1.92
Administrator Guide
EN 102.00.BS V1.92A
BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide
01 About the BioStar System ................................................... 12
1.1 Logical Configuration ......................................................................... 16
1.2 Access Control Features .................................................................... 17
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
User Authentication ................................................................................. 17
User Management ................................................................................... 19
Access Group Management .................................................................... 19
Device Management ................................................................................ 19
Door and Elevator (Lift) Management ..................................................... 19
Zone Management ................................................................................... 20
Time and Attendance ............................................................................... 20
IP Camera and NVR Server Management ............................................... 20
1.3 Functional differences between a 1.x device and a 2.x device ........ 21
02 Install the BioStar Software .................................................. 23
2.1 System Requirements ........................................................................ 23
2.2 Run the BioStar Installer .................................................................... 24
2.3 Install the BioStar Server Application ............................................... 26
2.3.1
2.3.2
Configure the MySQL Database .............................................................. 28
Configure the BioStar Server ................................................................... 29
2.4 Install the BioStar Client Application ................................................. 30
2.4.1
Log in to BioStar for the First Time ......................................................... 32
2.5 BioStar Interface ................................................................................. 33
2.6 Customize the BioStar Interface ........................................................ 33
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
Change the Theme ................................................................................... 33
Customize the Toolbar ............................................................................. 34
Change Event Views................................................................................. 34
Change Event Views................................................................................. 35
2.7 Migrate a Database from BioAdmin to BioStar................................. 35
03 Setup the BioStar System ..................................................... 36
3.1 Create Administrative Accounts ........................................................ 36
3.1.1
3.1.2
Administrative Levels .............................................................................. 36
Add and Customize Administrative Accounts ........................................ 37
3.1.2.1
3.1.2.2
3.1.2.3
Add an administrative account ....................................................... 37
Change an administrative account level or password .................... 38
Create a custom administration level ............................................. 38
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
ii
BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide
3.2 Setup Devices ..................................................................................... 40
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
Search for and Add Devices..................................................................... 40
Search for and Add Slave Devices ........................................................... 42
Add an RF Device ..................................................................................... 43
Connect a Device via Wireless LAN ......................................................... 44
Configure a BioStation Device ................................................................. 46
Configure a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W Device ..................................... 48
3.2.6.1
3.2.7
3.2.8
Configure a BioLite Net Device ................................................................ 49
Configure an Xpass or Xpass S2 Device ................................................. 51
3.2.8.1
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.12
3.2.13
3.2.14
3.2.15
3.2.16
Issue command cards ..................................................................... 49
Issue command cards ..................................................................... 52
Configure an X-Station Device ................................................................ 52
Configure a BioStation T2 Device ............................................................ 54
Configure a FaceStation Device .............................................................. 56
Configure a BioStation 2 Device .............................................................. 57
Configure a BioStation A2 Device ............................................................ 58
Configure a BioStation L2 Device ............................................................ 60
Configure a BioEntry W2 Device .............................................................. 61
Change Wiegand Formats ....................................................................... 62
3.2.16.1
3.2.16.2
3.2.16.3
Configure a 26-bit Wiegand format ................................................. 63
Configure a pass-through Wiegand format .................................... 64
Configure a custom Wiegand format .............................................. 64
3.3 Setup Doors ........................................................................................ 66
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
Add a Door ............................................................................................... 66
Associate a Device With a Door............................................................... 66
Configure a Door ...................................................................................... 67
Create a Door Group ................................................................................ 68
3.4 Setup Elevators (Lifts) ........................................................................ 68
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
Add an Elevator ........................................................................................ 68
Associate a Device With an Elevator ....................................................... 68
Configure an Elevator............................................................................... 69
Add Users to an Elevator ......................................................................... 70
Transfer Settings to an Elevator .............................................................. 70
3.5 Setup Zones ........................................................................................ 71
3.5.1
3.5.2
Determine Which Zones to Use ............................................................... 71
Add and Configure Zones ........................................................................ 72
3.5.2.1
3.5.2.2
3.5.2.3
3.5.2.4
3.5.2.5
3.5.2.6
Add a zone ....................................................................................... 73
Add a device to a zone .................................................................... 73
Configure zone inputs ..................................................................... 75
Configure alarm actions and outputs ............................................. 75
Configure arm and disarm settings................................................. 76
Configure external input/output settings ........................................ 77
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
iii
BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide
3.5.2.7
3.5.2.8
Select access groups ...................................................................... 78
View zone events ............................................................................. 78
3.6 Setup Users ........................................................................................ 79
3.6.1
3.6.2
Create a User Account ............................................................................. 79
Register Fingerprints ............................................................................... 81
3.6.2.1
3.6.2.2
3.6.2.3
3.6.3
3.6.4
Capture Face Images ............................................................................... 84
Issue Access Cards.................................................................................. 86
3.6.4.1
3.6.4.2
3.6.4.3
3.6.4.4
3.6.4.5
3.6.4.6
3.6.4.7
3.6.4.8
3.6.4.9
3.6.4.10
3.6.5
Issue EM4100 cards ........................................................................ 87
Issue HID proximity cards ............................................................... 88
Issue FeliCa cards ........................................................................... 88
Issue MIFARE, DESFire or iCLASS CSN cards ................................. 89
Issue MIFARE, DESFire or iCLASS template cards .......................... 90
Change the MIFARE, DESFire or iCLASS site key ............................ 91
Edit the MIFARE layout .................................................................... 92
Edit the DESFire layout .................................................................... 93
Edit the iCLASS layout ..................................................................... 94
Read card information from USB-based readers ............................ 95
Transfer User Data ................................................................................... 95
3.6.5.1
3.6.5.2
3.6.5.3
3.6.5.4
3.6.6
Place fingers on the sensor ............................................................. 82
Register fingerprints ........................................................................ 82
Enroll users via command cards ..................................................... 84
Transfer a user to a device .............................................................. 95
Synchronize all users ...................................................................... 96
Retrieve user data from a device ..................................................... 96
Merge user data imported from the device ..................................... 97
User Data Encryption ............................................................................... 98
3.7 Setup Timezones ................................................................................ 99
3.7.1
3.7.2
Create a Timezone ................................................................................... 99
Create a Holiday Schedule ..................................................................... 100
3.8 Setup Access Groups ....................................................................... 102
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
Add an Access Group............................................................................. 102
Add Users to Access Groups ................................................................. 103
Assign Access Groups to Users ............................................................ 103
Transfer Access Groups to Devices ...................................................... 104
Check for Access Rules by Device ........................................................ 104
3.9 Setup Time and Attendance ............................................................ 105
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.9.4
3.9.5
Add a Time Category ............................................................................. 105
Add a Daily Schedule ............................................................................. 106
Add a Shift .............................................................................................. 109
Assign Users to Shifts ........................................................................... 110
Choose a Device for T&A ....................................................................... 113
3.10 Setup Alarms .................................................................................... 114
3.10.1 Configure Alarm Settings and Sounds .................................................. 114
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
iv
BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide
3.10.1.1
3.10.1.2
Customize alarm actions ............................................................... 114
Add custom alarm sounds ............................................................. 115
3.10.2 Configure email notifications ................................................................ 115
3.10.3 Configure Settings for External Devices ................................................ 118
3.10.3.1
3.10.3.2
Configure outputs to external devices ........................................... 118
Configure inputs from external devices ......................................... 119
3.11 Setup Cameras ................................................................................. 120
3.11.1 Add an NVR Server ................................................................................. 120
3.11.2 Add an IP Camera .................................................................................. 123
3.11.3 Configure an IP Camera ......................................................................... 124
04 Manage the BioStar System ............................................... 125
4.1 Monitor Events in Real Time ............................................................ 125
4.1.1
4.1.2
Monitor Muster Zones in Real Time ...................................................... 127
Monitor Areas with Cameras in Real Time ............................................ 128
4.2 View Event Logs ............................................................................... 128
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
Upload Logs to BioStar .......................................................................... 129
View Logs in User, Door, and Zone Panes ............................................. 129
View Logs from the Monitoring Pane .................................................... 130
View Access Logs .................................................................................. 131
4.3 Monitor Door Events via a Visual Map ............................................ 132
4.3.1
4.3.2
Create a Visual Map ............................................................................... 132
Monitor Doors on a Visual Map ............................................................. 133
4.4 Control Doors, Alarms, and Devices Remotely ............................... 135
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
Open or Close Doors .............................................................................. 136
Release Alarms ...................................................................................... 136
Lock or Unlock Devices ......................................................................... 136
4.4.3.1
4.4.3.2
4.4.3.3
Lock or unlock connected devices ................................................ 136
Set automatic device locking ........................................................ 137
Reset a device lock ........................................................................ 138
4.5 Manage Users ................................................................................... 139
4.5.1
Delete Users ........................................................................................... 139
4.5.1.1
4.5.1.2
4.5.2
4.5.3
Transfer Users to Other Departments ................................................... 141
Customize User Information Fields ....................................................... 141
4.5.3.1
4.5.3.2
4.5.4
4.5.5
Delete an individual user via command cards .............................. 139
Delete all users via command cards ............................................. 140
Add new information fields ........................................................... 141
Modify existing information fields ................................................ 142
Export User Data .................................................................................... 142
Import User Data.................................................................................... 143
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
v
BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide
4.6 Manage Time and Attendance ......................................................... 144
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
Monitor T&A Status via the IO Board..................................................... 144
Generate T&A Reports ........................................................................... 145
Modify T&A Reports ............................................................................... 148
Print or Export T&A Report Data ............................................................ 149
4.7 Manage Devices ............................................................................... 150
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
Remove Devices ..................................................................................... 150
Upgrade Device Firmware...................................................................... 150
Downgrade Device Firmware ................................................................. 151
4.8 Activate Fingerprint Encryption ....................................................... 151
4.9 Change the Fingerprint Template .................................................... 152
05 Customize Settings ............................................................. 153
5.1 Customize Device Settings .............................................................. 153
5.1.1
Customize Settings for BioStation Devices .......................................... 153
5.1.1.1
5.1.1.2
5.1.1.3
5.1.1.4
5.1.1.5
5.1.1.6
5.1.1.7
5.1.1.8
5.1.1.9
5.1.1.10
5.1.2
Customize Settings for BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W Devices .............. 166
5.1.2.1
5.1.2.2
5.1.2.3
5.1.2.4
5.1.2.5
5.1.2.6
5.1.2.7
5.1.2.8
5.1.2.9
5.1.2.10
5.1.3
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 154
Fingerprint tab ............................................................................... 156
Network tab ................................................................................... 157
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 158
Input tab ........................................................................................ 159
Output tab ...................................................................................... 160
Black List tab ................................................................................. 162
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 163
T&A tab .......................................................................................... 164
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 165
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 166
Fingerprint tab ............................................................................... 169
Network tab ................................................................................... 169
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 171
Input tab ........................................................................................ 172
Output tab ...................................................................................... 173
Black List tab ................................................................................. 174
Command Card tab ....................................................................... 175
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 175
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 176
Customize Settings for BioLite Net Devices ......................................... 177
5.1.3.1
5.1.3.2
5.1.3.3
5.1.3.4
5.1.3.5
5.1.3.6
5.1.3.7
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 177
Fingerprint tab ............................................................................... 179
Network tab ................................................................................... 181
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 182
Input tab ........................................................................................ 183
Output tab ...................................................................................... 184
Black List tab ................................................................................. 185
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
vi
BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide
5.1.3.8
5.1.3.9
5.1.3.10
5.1.4
Customize Settings for Xpass Devices ................................................. 189
5.1.4.1
5.1.4.2
5.1.4.3
5.1.4.4
5.1.4.5
5.1.4.6
5.1.4.7
5.1.4.8
5.1.4.9
5.1.5
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 207
Camera tab .................................................................................... 208
Network tab ................................................................................... 209
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 210
Interphone tab ................................................................................ 211
Input tab ........................................................................................ 212
Output tab ...................................................................................... 213
Black List tab ................................................................................. 214
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 215
T&A tab .......................................................................................... 216
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 218
Customize Settings for BioStation T2 Devices ..................................... 218
5.1.7.1
5.1.7.2
5.1.7.3
5.1.7.4
5.1.7.5
5.1.7.6
5.1.7.7
5.1.7.8
5.1.7.9
5.1.7.10
5.1.7.11
5.1.7.12
5.1.8
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 198
Network tab ................................................................................... 199
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 200
Input tab ........................................................................................ 201
Output tab ...................................................................................... 203
Command Card tab ....................................................................... 204
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 205
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 206
Customize Settings for X-Station Devices ............................................ 206
5.1.6.1
5.1.6.2
5.1.6.3
5.1.6.4
5.1.6.5
5.1.6.6
5.1.6.7
5.1.6.8
5.1.6.9
5.1.6.10
5.1.6.11
5.1.7
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 189
Network tab ................................................................................... 191
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 192
Input tab ........................................................................................ 193
Output tab ...................................................................................... 194
Blacklist ......................................................................................... 195
Command Card tab ....................................................................... 195
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 196
Wiegand tab................................................................................... 197
Customize Settings for Xpass S2 Devices ............................................ 198
5.1.5.1
5.1.5.2
5.1.5.3
5.1.5.4
5.1.5.5
5.1.5.6
5.1.5.7
5.1.5.8
5.1.6
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 186
T&A tab .......................................................................................... 187
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 188
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 219
Fingerprint tab ............................................................................... 221
Camera tab .................................................................................... 222
Network tab ................................................................................... 223
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 224
Interphone tab ............................................................................... 225
Input tab ........................................................................................ 226
Output tab ...................................................................................... 227
Black List tab ................................................................................. 228
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 229
T&A tab .......................................................................................... 230
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 232
Customize Settings for FaceStation Devices ........................................ 232
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
vii
BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide
5.1.8.1
5.1.8.2
5.1.8.3
5.1.8.4
5.1.8.5
5.1.8.6
5.1.8.7
5.1.8.8
5.1.8.9
5.1.8.10
5.1.8.11
5.1.9
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 232
Face tab ......................................................................................... 235
Camera tab .................................................................................... 235
Network tab ................................................................................... 236
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 238
Interphone tab ............................................................................... 238
Input tab ........................................................................................ 240
Output tab ...................................................................................... 241
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 242
T&A tab .......................................................................................... 244
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 245
Customize Settings for BioStation 2 Devices ....................................... 246
5.1.9.1
5.1.9.2
5.1.9.3
5.1.9.4
5.1.9.5
5.1.9.6
5.1.9.7
5.1.9.8
5.1.9.9
5.1.9.10
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 246
Fingerprint tab ............................................................................... 248
Network tab ................................................................................... 249
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 251
Interphone tab ............................................................................... 251
Input tab ........................................................................................ 251
Black List tab ................................................................................. 252
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 252
T&A tab .......................................................................................... 254
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 255
5.1.10 Customize Settings for BioStation A2 Devices ..................................... 256
5.1.10.1
5.1.10.2
5.1.10.3
5.1.10.4
5.1.10.5
5.1.10.6
5.1.10.7
5.1.10.8
5.1.10.9
5.1.10.10
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 256
Fingerprint tab ............................................................................... 258
Camera tab .................................................................................... 260
Network tab ................................................................................... 260
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 261
Input tab ........................................................................................ 261
Black List tab ................................................................................. 263
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 263
T&A tab .......................................................................................... 264
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 265
5.1.11 Customize Settings for BioStation L2 Devices ..................................... 266
5.1.11.1
5.1.11.2
5.1.11.3
5.1.11.4
5.1.11.5
5.1.11.6
5.1.11.7
5.1.11.8
5.1.11.9
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 266
Fingerprint tab ............................................................................... 269
Network tab ................................................................................... 270
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 271
Input tab ........................................................................................ 271
Black List tab ................................................................................. 272
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 273
T&A tab .......................................................................................... 274
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 275
5.1.12 Customize Settings for BioEntry W2 Devices........................................ 276
5.1.12.1
5.1.12.2
5.1.12.3
5.1.12.4
Operation Mode tab ....................................................................... 276
Fingerprint tab ............................................................................... 278
Network tab ................................................................................... 279
Access Control tab ........................................................................ 280
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
viii
BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide
5.1.12.5
5.1.12.6
5.1.12.7
5.1.12.8
5.1.12.9
Input tab ........................................................................................ 280
Black List tab ................................................................................. 281
Display/Sound tab ......................................................................... 282
T&A tab .......................................................................................... 283
Wiegand tab ................................................................................... 283
5.2 Customize Door Settings ................................................................. 284
5.2.1
5.2.2
Details tab .............................................................................................. 284
Alarm tab ................................................................................................ 287
5.3 Customize Zone Settings ................................................................. 288
5.3.1
Customize Settings for Anti-Passback Zones ...................................... 288
5.3.1.1
5.3.1.2
5.3.1.3
5.3.2
Customize Settings for Entrance Limit Zones ...................................... 289
5.3.2.1
5.3.2.2
5.3.2.3
5.3.3
Details tab ..................................................................................... 295
Customize Settings for Muster Zones................................................... 295
5.3.6.1
5.3.6.2
5.3.7
Details tab ..................................................................................... 293
Alarm tab ....................................................................................... 294
Customize Settings for Access Zones .................................................. 295
5.3.5.1
5.3.6
Details tab ..................................................................................... 291
Alarm tab ....................................................................................... 292
Access Group tab .......................................................................... 293
Customize Settings for Fire Alarm Zones ............................................. 293
5.3.4.1
5.3.4.2
5.3.5
Details tab ..................................................................................... 290
Alarm tab ....................................................................................... 290
Access Group tab .......................................................................... 291
Customize Settings for Alarm Zones .................................................... 291
5.3.3.1
5.3.3.2
5.3.3.3
5.3.4
Details tab ..................................................................................... 288
Alarm tab ....................................................................................... 288
Access Group tab .......................................................................... 289
Details tab ..................................................................................... 295
Access Group tab .......................................................................... 297
Customize Settings for Interlock Zones ................................................ 297
5.3.7.1
Details tab ..................................................................................... 297
5.4 Customize User Settings.................................................................. 298
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
Details Tab ............................................................................................. 298
Fingerprints Tab ..................................................................................... 300
Face Tab ................................................................................................. 300
Card Tab ................................................................................................. 301
T&A Tab .................................................................................................. 301
06 Technical Support ............................................................... 302
07 Open Licenses .................................................................... 303
Glossary ................................................................................... 306
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
ix
BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide
Warranty and Disclaimers
Suprema Warranty Policy
Suprema warrants to Buyer, subject to the limitations set forth below, that each product shall operate
in substantial accordance with the published specifications for such product for a period of one (1)
year from the date of shipment of products ("Warranty Period"). If Buyer notifies Suprema in writing
within the Warranty Period of any defects covered by this warranty, Suprema shall, at its option, repair
or replace the defective product that is returned to Suprema within the Warranty Period, with freight
and insurance prepaid by Buyer. Such repair or replacement shall be Suprema's exclusive remedy for
breach of warranty with respect to the Product. This limited warranty shall not extend to any product
that has been: (i) subject to unusual physical or electrical stress, misuse, neglect, accident or abuse,
or damaged by any other external causes; (ii) improperly repaired, altered or modified in any way
unless such modification is approved in writing by the Supplier; (iii) improperly installed or used in
violation of instructions furnished by Suprema.
Suprema shall be notified in writing of defects in the RMA (Return Material Authorization) report
supplied by Suprema not later than thirty days after such defects have appeared and at the latest one
year after the date of shipment of the Product. The report should include full details of each defective
product, model number, invoice number, and serial number. No product without an RMA number
issued by Suprema may be accepted and all defects must be reproducible for warranty service.
Except as expressly provided herein, the products are provided "as is" without warranty of any kind,
either express or implied, including, but not limited to, warranties or merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is provided in connection with Suprema products. No license,
express or implied, by estoppels or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this
document, except as provided in Suprema’s Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products.
Suprema assumes no liability whatsoever and Suprema disclaims any express or implied warranty,
relating to sale and/or use of Suprema products, including liability or warranties relating to fitness for
a particular purpose, merchantability, or infringement of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual
property right.
Suprema products are not intended for use in medical, lifesaving, or life sustaining applications or
other applications in which the failure of the Suprema product could create a situation where
personal injury or death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use Suprema products for any such
unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall indemnify and hold Suprema and its officers,
employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and distributors harmless against all claims, costs, damages,
expenses, and reasonable attorney fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal
injury or death associated with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that
Suprema was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part.
Suprema reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time
without notice to improve reliability, function, or design. Designers must not rely on the absence or
characteristics of any features or instructions marked "reserved" or "undefined." Supreme reserves
these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or
incompatibilities arising from future changes to them.
Please contact Suprema, local Suprema sales representatives or local distributors to obtain the latest
specifications before placing your order.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
x
BioStar 1.92 Administrator Guide
Copyright Notice
This document is copyrighted © 2008-2013 by Suprema, Inc. All rights reserved. All other product
names, trademarks, or registered trademarks are property of their respective owners.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
xi
01
About the BioStar
System
BioStar is Suprema's next-generation access control system, based on IP connectivity and biometric
security. Most system devices integrate fingerprint scanners and card readers for multiple levels of
user authentication. However, Suprema's biometric devices, installed at each door, work not only as
card or fingerprint scanners and card readers, but also as intelligent access controllers.
The licensed standard edition of BioStar is unlocked by a USB dongle. Without the dongle, BioStar
functions as a free, but limited-capability version. With the dongle, BioStar offers greater versatility
and additional features, as shown in the table below:
Standard Edition
Free Version
Maximum # of doors
512
20
Maximum # of
clients
32
2
Zone support
Yes
No
Email notifications
Yes
No
Server matching
Yes
No
Shift types
Daily and Weekly
Weekly only
IO board
Yes
No
Visual Map
Yes
No
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
12

1. About the BioStar System
BioStar V1.92 supports the following devices:

BioStation A2: This fingerprint recognition device is developed based on
SUPREMA's newest fingerprint recognition technology and hardware
platform. This device supports all functions regarding access control
and attendance management, including authentication speed of up to
150,000 people per second, Live Finger Detection (LFD) function, face
detection, PoE and attendance management.

BioStation 2: This device enables high-speed matching and powerful
authentication performance using SUPREMA's upgraded biometric
recognition technology and high performance CPU as well as highspeed transmission of massive data. This product features luxurious
external design and an IP65-rated waterproof and dustproof structure
so that it can be installed in various environments.

BioStation L2: BioStation L2 is a fingerprint recognition device that
provides both access control and attendance management functions.
Up to 100,000 templates can be saved and this device provides a
process speed of up to 100,000 people per second, Live Finger
Detection (LFD) function, and attendance management function.

BioEntry W2: BioEntry W2 is an access control and time & attendance
device in which Suprema’s latest hardware and software coexists. This
device mounts a quad-core CPU, 2GB of memory, OP5 sensor, and the
latest fingerprint algorithm. It can match 150,000 fingerprints in a single
second. It also includes live fingerprint detection (LFD) and time &
attendance features to provide excellent performance. This device can
be used in various environments since the device has a small width size
of 50mm and IK08 rated vandal-proof, and IP67 dust & water proof
structure. This device also provides added flexibility in system design
feature multi-card support with dual-frequency RFID technology.

Secure I/O 2: This is a separable controller with an ultra slim design for
one external door relay control and input and output expansion. It is
used with SUPREMA's IP access control terminals and encrypted
communication, reinforcing security and providing an optimized
solution according to the service environment.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
13

1. About the BioStar System

BioStation (V1.5 or later): BioStation is a multifunctional terminal with a
keypad and a 2.5-inch color LCD monitor that allows you to perform
user enrollment and administration functions directly from the device.
BioStation can be connected to a network via a wireless LAN or Ethernet
and includes USB host and device interfaces for easy data transfer.
BioStation MIFARE (BSM) models also support entry control via smart
cards.

BioStation T2: BioStation T2 is a multifunctional, IP-based access
control terminal with a camera, 5-inch touchscreen, fingerprint scanner,
card reader, and built-in video phone feature.

FaceStation: FaceStation is a multifunctional, IP-based access control
terminal with an LCD touchscreen and a camera for face recognition
and videophone functions. FaceStation supports multiple interfaces for
connecting to computers or networks and access controls via Wiegand
and I/O ports. In addition, the device allows for authorization via
multiple access cards.

BioEntry Plus (V1.2 or later): BioEntry Plus is an IP-based access
control device that includes both fingerprint recognition and entry via
access card. The device can be controlled independently via command
cards or managed entirely via the BioStar interface. BioEntry Plus can
be connected to electric door strikes via an internal relay or used with
the Secure I/O device for extra security and expanded capability.

BioEntry W : The BioEntry W includes all of the features of the BioEntry
Plus in a vandal-resistant, IP65-rated structure. BioEntry W is ideal for
outdoor installation, with exceptional durability in harsh environments.
It features extensive communication interfaces and PoE capability.

BioLite Net (V1.0 or later): BioLite Net is IP-based fingerprint terminal
designed specifically for outdoor use. With a rugged, IP65-rated
waterproof structure, it offers extra durability to withstand the elements.
As either a simple door control or part of a complex, networked
environment, BioLite Net supports the full functionality of BioStar’s time
and attendance and access control features.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
14

1. About the BioStar System

Xpass: Xpass is an IP-based access reader/controller designed
exclusively for use with RF cards. It provides many similar functions to
the BioEntry Plus device, but is waterproof for outdoor use and can be
connected and powered by a single CAT5/6 cable.

Xpass S2: The Xpass S2 device is a slimmer version of the Xpass that
supports FeliCa and ISO 15693 cards. Its low profile allows it to be
installed in tight spaces and it features access control to floors when
connected with a LIFT I/O device via RS485 slave.

X-Station: X-Station is an easy-to-use smart IP terminal with a 3.5-inch
touchscreen LCD that supports ID and card access only. The device
supports face detection with a built-in camera. X-Station allows you to
store up to 200,000 users with 1GB of internal flash memory and 256MB
of RAM.

BioMini/BioMini Plus: The BioMini and BioMini Plus devices are
fingerprint scanners that can be used for convenient user enrollment.
Installing the device is simple: plug them into a USB connection on any
computer that is connected to the BioStar server and install a driver.

Secure I/O: The Secure I/O device provides a convenient way to
increase the security of externally mounted devices or expand the
capabilities of your system. When doors are controlled by a secure I/O
device, intruders cannot open doors even if they succeed in uninstalling
external devices. To further increase security, the secure I/O device
provides encrypted communications between door components. The
Secure I/O device has four input switches and two output relays to
allow control of multiple components with a single device.

LIFT I/O: The LIFT I/O supports 0-9 device IDs and 12 output ports (12
input ports are not currently supported). Each output can be connected
to an elevator button to control access to floors. The LIFT I/O can be
connected via RS485 as a slave to Xpass and Xpass S2 devices. Up to
10 LIFT I/O devices can be connected to a BioEntry Plus, Xpass or
Xpass S2 device to control up to 120 floors.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
15

1. About the BioStar System
1.1
Logical Configuration
BioStar is a distributed intelligence system. Instead of the complex wiring and centralized
control required by conventional access control systems, Suprema's access control
devices can be connected via TCP/IP or wirelessly to a local area network or connected
directly via serial connections. User information, access rules, and other data can be
distributed to each device to speed up authorization time and provide continual operation
even when the connection to the network is lost.
As the following graphic illustrates, the BioStar system does not require separate access
controllers. This feature provides a distinct advantage over other access control systems,
because BioStation, BioEntry Plus, or BioEntry W devices act simultaneously as both a
controller and a reader. As a result, Suprema's distributed intelligence approach requires
less hardware and less wiring than conventional, centralized access control systems.
BioStar is a server-client application that supports up to 32 clients (2 clients maximum in
the free version). A typical configuration consists of numerous access control devices
connected to a central server via Ethernet, WLAN, and/or RS485. BioStar is compatible with
MS SQL Server and MySQL databases.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
16

1. About the BioStar System
Overall, the system supports a maximum of 512 doors and 512 devices (20 doors and
devices in the free version). Networked devices can be easily grouped together to create
various combinations of anti-passback or alarm zones, as illustrated by the graphic that
follows.
1.2
Access Control Features
The BioStar system goes a step beyond conventional access control systems, by combining unique
biometric identification with configurable access card capabilities.
1.2.1
User Authentication
Suprema's access control devices incorporate advanced, award-winning fingerprint
recognition algorithms to provide secure access control. The system allows for a wide
variety of user authentication modes:

Fingerprint or access card: either a fingerprint scan or access card may be used to
gain entry.

Fingerprint + access card: both fingerprint scan and access card are required for
access.

User ID + fingerprint: a user ID and fingerprint scan are used in combination; the user
ID identifies the user and the fingerprint scan is used for authorization.

User ID + password: a user ID and password are used in combination; the user ID
identifies the user and the password is used for authorization.

User ID + card + fingerprint: a user ID, access card, and fingerprint scan are used in
combination.

Fingerprint only: authentication via a fingerprint scan is the only method to gain entry.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
17

1. About the BioStar System

Card only: authentication via an access card is the only method to gain entry.
[FaceStation Only]

Face: authentication via face recognition is the only method to gain entry.

Face + Password: authentication via face recognition plus password.

Face + Card: authentication via face recognition plus access card.

Face + Card or Password: authentication via face recognition plus access card or
password.

Face + Card + Password: authentication via face recognition plus card plus password.

User ID + Face: authentication via user ID plus face recognition.

User ID + Face or Password: authentication via user ID plus face regognition or
password.

User ID + Face + Password: authentication via user ID plus face recognition plus
password.
[BioStation A2, X-Station, BioStation T2, and FaceStation]

Detect face: upon successful authentication, a face image is captured.
BioStar stores two templates of each fingerprint and up to two fingerprints per user (four
templates total). If desired, one fingerprint can be used as a duress signal, to activate
alarms or send alerts in situations where a user is required to gain access under duress.
Duplicate templates of each print enhance authentication performance by reducing the
likelihood of false rejections. For more information about registering fingerprints, see
section 3.6.2.
BioStar also provides administrators with the ability to read EM4100 and HID proximity
cards and read, issue, and format MIFARE® and iCLASS® access cards. For more
information about access cards, see section 3.6.4.
BioStation A2, X-Station, BioStation T2 and FaceStation devices are equipped with
cameras to allow for face detection and recording of face images for enhanced security.
For more information about face detection, see section 3.6.3.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
18

1. About the BioStar System
1.2.2
User Management
BioStar supports both manual and automatic modes for user management. Manual
synchronization is available for enrolling different subsets of users to particular devices or
when the total number of users in the BioStar database exceeds the limits of a device.
Automatic synchronization is available when managing user records at the device is not
required or desired.
BioStar collects log records from devices and allows the data to be exported to a delimited
text file (.CSV) for custom reporting. The software supports an unlimited number of user
records—the maximum amount of data stored is subject only to the capabilities of the
underlying database and hardware configuration. For more information about user
management, see sections 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, and 4.6.
1.2.3
Access Group Management
BioStar allows administrators to build custom access groups by combining permissions
for timezones and doors. With this capability, BioStar provides customizable, scheduled
access control.
BioStar supports up to 128 timezones that consist of a seven day schedule, plus two
holiday schedules. Each day in a timezone can include as many as five distinct time
periods.
In total, BioStar supports up to 128 access groups that can be transferred to all connected
devices. For more information about access groups, see section 3.8.
1.2.4
Device Management
Administrators can control multiple aspects of devices via the BioStar software. In addition
to authentication behaviors, BioStar supports the configuration of inputs, output relays,
actions, and sounds. The system includes options for customizing sound and display
settings for BioStation A2, BioStation 2, BioStation L2, BioStation, X-Station, BioStation T2
and FaceStation devices, and LED & Buzzer settings for other devices.
The system provides configuration options for controlling external devices, such as door
strikes and alarm sirens. BioStar can also connect to and communicate with third-party
devices via a Wiegand interface. For more information about device management, see
sections 3.2 and 4.7.
1.2.5
Door and Elevator (Lift) Management
BioStar allows for comprehensive control of doors and connected devices, such as door
relays, alarm relays, door sensors, and exit switches. Each door can be operated by up to
two devices and, when two devices are connected to a door, administrators can apply antipassback controls. BioStar also allows for control of elevators (lifts) via BioEntry Plus,
Xpass and Xpass S2 devices, with Secure I/O devices connected as slaves.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
19

1. About the BioStar System
BioStar allows specific configuration of alarm events for doors that are forced open or held
open longer than a specified interval, including activating alarm sounds from individual
devices, sending signals to external alarm sirens, displaying warnings in the BioStar user
interface, and sending e-mail notifications (not available in the free version). In addition,
administrators or operators can remotely lock and unlock doors or reset alarms. For more
information about door management, see sections 3.3, 4.3, and 4.4. For more information
about elevator management, see section 3.4.
1.2.6
Zone Management
The BioStar system gives administrators complete control of various zones (not available
in the free version). Zones can be created with devices connected via Ethernet or RS485
and can include a master device and up to 65 member devices. In addition, individual
devices can be included in up to four zones.
BioStar supports zones for increased access control, such as anti-passback and entrance
limit zones, as well as zones that provide control for alarm or fire alarm outputs and
actions. BioStar also allows administrators to synchronize time, event logs, and user data
for all devices in a specified zone. For more information about zone management, see
section 3.5.
1.2.7
Time and Attendance
BioStar versions 1.2 and higher include time and attendance features to allow
administrators to define time categories, shifts, daily schedules, and holiday settings. The
T&A capabilities of BioStar can be used to enforce compliance with check-in and checkout procedures, restrict access to off-duty personnel, and report attendance data.
BioStar allows administrators to customize T&A functions for BioStation A2, BioStation 2,
BioStation L2, BioEntry W2, BioStation, X-Station, BioStation T2 and FaceStation devices
and to specify how events are recorded. The BioStar interface also allows administrators to
monitor a user’s check-in and check-out status in real time. For more information about
time and attendance, see sections 3.9 and 4.6.
1.2.8
IP Camera and NVR Server Management
BioStar versions 1.5 and higher support internet protocol (IP) cameras and network video
recorder (NVR) servers, to allow administrators to monitor areas and be notified of specific
events with real-time still images transferred from the IP cameras. By interoperating with
the NVR servers, the BioStar system can also display time-sorted event logs, together with
recorded videos stored on the servers. From the BioStar interface, administrators can add
and customize IP cameras and their functions. For more information about the IP cameras
and NVR servers, see sections 3.11 and 4.1.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
20

1. About the BioStar System
1.3
Functional differences between a 1.x device and a 2.x
device
The firmware structure of SUPREMA’s devices is different between devices which support
BioStar 1 and devices which support BioStar 2. Therefore, a device which supports BioStar
2 cannot be connected and used with BioStar 1. However, BioStation 2, BioStation A2,
BioStation L2 and BioEntry W2 among the devices only supporting BioStar 2 were added to
be used in BioStar 1.
The following are the limitations that occur when connecting and using BioStation 2,
BioStation A2, BioStation L2 or BioEntry W2 with BioStar 1. Check the following limitations
before configuring the system.
Compatible 2.x Device

BioStar 1.91: BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation L2

BioStar 1.92: BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2
Compatible Firmware

BioStation 2: 1.2.1 version or later

BioStation A2: 1.1.0 version or later

BioStation L2: 1.0.1 version or later

BioEntry W2: 1.0.0 version or later
User

Import user: Department information and PIN cannot be imported.

Card: A security credential card, which could be issued in BioStar 2, cannot be issued.
In addition, only one card can be used.

Scanning a fingerprint and reading a card: The master device should be used for
scanning a user’s fingerprint or issuing a card. A 2.x device connected as the slave
cannot scan a fingerprint or read a card.
Door

Door: A 1.x device and a 2.x device cannot be used together for configuring the door. In
other words, devices of different versions cannot be set for the entrance and exit
devices.

Zone: A 1.x device and a 2.x device cannot be used together for configuring a zone. In
other words, a zone cannot be configured with devices of different versions.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
21

1. About the BioStar System
Access control

Full Access / No Access: A 2.x device uses the access control information of users in
preference to full access/no access set for the device. If there is no access control
information set for the device, access is possible with the user authentication
information registered by default, and in order to control the access of users
specifically, access control information must be set.
Device

Device tree: A 2.x device is always displayed on the sublist of the BioStar Server. If the
server mode is used, a 1.x device is displayed on the sublist of BioStar Server, and if
the direct mode is used, it is displayed on the sublist of the device.

Network tab: RS485 mode, which can be set for a 2.x device, is different from a 1.x
device. The default value, host, and slave can be set as the RS485 mode for a 2.x
device, and if the default value is set, one door can be configured with one device. Also,
when a device whose Default Value is set for the RS485 mode is connected to the host
device using a RS485 cable, it can also be registered as a slave device in the BioStar.

Input/output tab: Device version 2.x only uses the input tab.

Wiegand tab: Only the extension mode is supported for the Wiegand mode.

MIFARE card CSN: Byte order of MIFARE card ID is different from a 1.x device. If Byte
Order of 1.x devices is set to MSB, Byte Order of 2.x devices should be set to LSB. If
Byte Order of 1.x devices is set to LSB, Byte Order of 2.x devices should be set to MSB.
Monitoring

Arm/disarm: Arm/disarm cannot be used for a door or zone which is configured with a
2.x device.

Uploading a log: A log can be uploaded using USB for a 2.x device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
22
Install the BioStar Software
02
Install the BioStar
Software
Installing BioStar is a fairly simplistic process, provided that you address a few prerequisites before
beginning the installation:

First, you must select a PC that can remain running constantly to function as the BioStar server.
The server will receive and store log data from connected devices in real time.

Second, you must choose a type of database to use. The BioStar server supports either MySQL or
MS SQL Server (including the scaled-down, free MS SQL Server Express). Regardless of which
database you choose, you must have sufficient access rights and privileges to connect to the
database and create new tables.

Third, ensure that the PCs you will use for both server and client applications meet the minimum
requirements listed in section 2.1.
The BioStar installation CD includes the BioStar installer. By default, the installer will install both the
server and client applications with minimal input (see section 2.2). However, you may choose to
install the server and client applications independently if you need to specify additional database
options or desire to install the applications on separate PCs (see sections 2.3 and 2.4).
2.1
System Requirements
BioStar supports the following operating systems:

Windows 8 (32-bit and 64-bit system)

Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit platform)

Windows Server 2008 R2

Windows Vista

Windows XP, Service Pack 1 or later

Windows Server 2003
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
23

2. Install the BioStar Software

Windows 2000, Service Pack 4 or later
The minimum system requirements for installing and operating the BioStar software
include the following:

CPU: Intel Dual Core or similar processor, capable of processing speeds of 1.5GHz or
faster

RAM: 2GB

HDD: 5GB
However, Suprema recommends the following hardware configuration for optimal
performance:

CPU: Intel Quad Core or similar processor, capable of processing speeds of 2GHz or
faster
2.2

RAM: 4GB

HDD: 10GB
Run the BioStar Installer
You should run the BioStar installer when you desire to install both the server and client
applications on the same PC and are willing to use the MS SQL Server Express database
with default settings. You will be required to intervene in the express installation process
only when MS SQL Server or a variation is already installed. In this case, you will be asked
whether or not you wish to install MS SQL Server Express. If you choose not to install the
express version, you will be required to provide the correct authentication details, as
described in step 7 of section 2.3.
!
!
Attention: If you have installed a previous installation on the machine with BioStar
installer, remove the old version before runninng the BioStar Installer.
Attention: Do not install BioStar 1 on a computer where BioStar 2 is installed. A problem
in the performance of the program may occur.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
24

2. Install the BioStar Software
The installer will install the following components:

BioStar server application

Auxiliary libraries: OpenSSL and Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable

MS SQL Server Express

BioStar client application

BADB Conv (database migration tool)
Before you run the BioStar installer, close all other open applications. If you have previously
installed BioAdmin on the same machine, ensure that you stop the BioAdmin server before
beginning the installation.
To run the installer:
1.
Insert the BioStar installation CD into a compatible media drive.
2.
Locate the installation directory and run BioStar 1.92 Setup.
3.
Follow the on-screen prompts to begin the installation.
4.
During the installation, you will be asked to select the language of your preference.
Select a language, then click Next to proceed.
5.
Make sure that both the Server and Client applications are selected in the Select
Features dialog box, then click Next to proceed.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
25

2. Install the BioStar Software
6.
2.3
Follow the instructions on the screen to finish the installation.
Install the BioStar Server Application
If you do not choose to install the BioStar server and client applications together, you need
to select only the application you would like to install at the Select Features dialog box
during the installation of the Biostar Setup. After you ensure that your system meets the
minimum requirements listed in section 2.1 and address the prerequisites mentioned in the
introduction to this chapter, close all other open applications. If you have previously
installed BioAdmin on the same machine, ensure that you stop the BioAdmin server before
beginning the installation.
!
Attention: If you have installed a previous installation on the machine with BioStar
installer, remove the old version before runninng the BioStar Installer.
The installer includes the following components:

BioStar server application

Auxiliary libraries: OpenSSL and Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable

MS SQL Server Express

BioStar client application

BADB Conv (database migration tool)
To install the BioStar server application:
1.
Insert the BioStar installation CD into a compatible media drive.
2.
Locate the installation directory and run BioStar 1.92 Setup.
3.
Follow the on-screen prompts to begin the installation.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
26

2. Install the BioStar Software
4.
During the installation, you will be asked to select the language of your preference.
Select a language, then click Next to proceed.
5.
At the Select Features dialog box, click the Client checkbox to uncheck it and exclude
the Biostar client application in the installation (both the server and slient
applications are checked by default), then click Next to proceed.
6.
Follow the instructions on the screen to finish the installation.
7.
During the installation, you will be required to accept the OpenSSL license agreement
and select a destination folder for the OpenSSL program files.
8.
You will also be asked whether or not you wish to install the MS SQL Server Express
edition. If you will use a pre-installed version of MS SQL Server, MySQL or Oracle, you
may click No when this message appears. If you decide to use the express edition in
this step, you can skip to step 10. The database setup process will be automated
when you install the express edition.
9.
When the Create Database [BioStar] dialog box appears, select a database type (MS
SQL Server, MySQL or Oracle). The database server address and port numbers will be
automatically populated, but you should verify that they are correct.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
27

2. Install the BioStar Software
Note: The default name for the database is always “BioStar,” to prevent unintentional
installation of multiple databases on the same system or database server. The database
name can be changed by editing the DBSetup.exe file. When patching the database server,
you will have the option to manually select a datbase.
10. If you choose MS SQL Server, you must configure the authentication method as well
(MySQL allows only server authentication):

Server authentication: this option uses login IDs and passwords to authenticate
users that are created by and stored on the SQL Server. These credentials are not
based on Windows user accounts. Users connecting via server authentication
must provide their credentials every time that they connect.

Windows authentication: this option uses Windows users accounts for
authentication. When users connect through a Windows user account, the SQL
Server validates the account name and password using the Windows principal
token in the operating system. The SQL Server does not ask for a password and
does not independently validate user identification. Windows authentication is the
default authentication mode for MS SQL Server.
Note: You must choose the authentication mode that is supported by the database. You
must also provide the proper credentials to create new tables in the database.
11. Click Setup to create the SQL database.
12. When the SQL database setup is complete, click Finish.
13. The setup program will perform a few remaining processes before the
server installation is complete. Click Finish.
2.3.1
Configure the MySQL Database
BioStar cannot use the MySQL database if the maximum packet size is less than 16MB. To
configure the maximum packet size n MySQL server, locate and open a configuration file
for the MySQL server (“my.ini” for a Windows system or “my.cnf” for a Linux system).
Under [mysqld], add or edit the packet size to 16M or bigger (for example:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
28

2. Install the BioStar Software
max_allowed_packet=16M). After you have changed and saved the file, restart the BioStar
Server for the changes to take effect.
2.3.2
Configure the BioStar Server
In some cases, you may require manual configuration of the BioStar server. If you are
having trouble connecting to the server from the client application, for example, you may
need to alter your server settings. In addition, you must stop and restart the server
application to apply any changes you have made to server configurations or database
settings.
On desktop, click BioStar Server Config to start BioStar Server setting program. Or, in
Windows, Start > All programs > BioStar 1.92 > Server Service > BioStar Server Config
The server configuration utility allows you to monitor and control the following:

Status: view and modify the current status of the BioStar server (Stopped or Started).
You can stop and start the server by clicking the Start or Stop button on the right.

Connection: view and modify the details for the connection between the server and
devices.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
29

2. Install the BioStar Software

–
TCP Port: enter the port that devices and client applications use to connect to the
server. You should use a port that is not shared with any other software
applications. Most devices supporting BioStar 1 use 1480 port as a default, and
BioStation A2, BioStation 2 and BioStation L2 use 51212 port as a default.
–
Thread Count: enter the maximum thread count that the BioStar server can create.
You can enter any number between 32 and 512; however, keep in mind a larger
thread count will consume more system resources.
–
Client List: click this button to view a list of devices that are connected to the
BioStar server. The list shows the IP address of each device and whether or not a
SSL certificate has been issued to the device. You can issue or remove SSL
certificates directly from the utility.
Server Matching: The function of the matcher used at the time of server matching is
improved according to the number of CPU cores in the system. Therefore, a faster
server matching speed can be expected as the number of cores used by the matcher
becomes larger. The following setting is supported at the Server Matching item in the
BioStar Server Config.
–

Number Of Core: means the number of cores used by the matcher and the default
number is 2.
Database: view and modify database settings. For more information about how to alter
these settings, see the procedure for setting up the BioStar server in section 2.3.
–

Max Connection: specify the maximum number of connections between the server
and the database. In most cases, the default value (1) is appropriate.
SSL: view or modify the settings for OpenSSL. Click Browse to locate the path for the
OpenSSL application or click Change to change the pass phrase.
2.4
Install the BioStar Client Application
If you do not choose to install the BioStar server and client applications together, you need
to select only the application you would like to install at the Select Features dialog box
during the installation of the Biostar Setup.
Before you install the BioStar client application, close all other running applications.
The installer includes the following components:

BioStar server application

Auxiliary libraries: OpenSSL and Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable

MS SQL Server Express

BioStar client application

BADB Conv (database migration tool)
To install BioStar client application:
1.
Insert the BioStar installation CD into a compatible media drive.
2.
Run BioStar 1.92 Setup to launch the installation wizard.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
30

2. Install the BioStar Software
3.
Follow the on-screen prompts to install the BioStar Client.
4.
During the installation, you will be asked to select the language of your preference.
Select a language, then click Next to proceed.
5.
At the Select Features dialog box, click the Server checkbox to uncheck it and exclude
the Biostar server application in the installation (both the server and client
applications are checked by default), then click Next to proceed.
6.
!
Follow the instructions on the screen to finish the installation.
Attention: BioStar versions 1.3 and higher include a USB driver, which enables the
connection of BioStation in Windows 7. This driver is not compatible with a previous
version of BioStar. If a previous version of BioStar is used, install the correct USB driver.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
31

2. Install the BioStar Software
2.4.1
Log in to BioStar for the First Time
If you restarted the system after installation, the BioStar server should run automatically in
the background. If you have not restarted the system, you may be required to manually
connect to the server before proceeding (see section 2.3.2). When logging in to BioStar for
the first time, you will be prompted to create an administrator account.
To log in for the first time:
1.
Launch the BioStar program. If BioStar successfully connects to the server, the Add
New Administrator dialog box will open. In this case, skip to step 6. If BioStar cannot
connect to the server, the Login dialog box will open and display the message “Cannot
connect to server.”
2.
Click Server Setting. This will open the Connect Server dialog box.
3.
Enter the IP address and port number of the BioStar server.
4.
Click Test to verify the connection.
5.
Click Save to store the connection settings. This will open the Add New Administrator
dialog box.
6.
Enter an Admin ID and password, confirm the password, and choose an
administration level from the drop-down level.
7.
Click OK. This will return you to the Login dialog box.
8.
Enter a User ID and password and click Login.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
32

2. Install the BioStar Software
2.5
BioStar Interface
BioStar is composed of various interface elements. Each element uses a standard name,
please check names of each element before you read this manual.
Each element is named as what is displayed in the title. For example, it is called User window,
Customize dialog box, Additional Infomation tab, Basic Information area.
2.6
Customize the BioStar Interface
You do not have to make any changes to the interface to use the BioStar system—the
default settings are sufficient for setup and operation. However, BioStar allows you to
customize various settings to control the appearance and functionality of the interface.
2.6.1
Change the Theme
The BioStar interface includes two preset themes based on MS Office styles:

Office 2003

Office 2007
To change the theme, click Theme from the menu bar and select a theme.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
33

2. Install the BioStar Software
2.6.2
Customize the Toolbar
The BioStar interface includes a standard toolbar near the top left of the screen. Standard
toolbar buttons provide functions similar to a typical web browser: Back, Forward, Refresh,
Find User (search), and Print.
To customize the toolbar:
1.
Click the drop-down arrow at the right of the toolbar.
2.
Click Add or Remove Buttons > Customize. This will open the Customize dialog box.
3.
Click the Commands tab.
4.
Click All Commands to display a list of available buttons.
5.
Drag a command to the toolbar. This will add a new button for the command.
2.6.3
Change Event Views
BioStar allows you to change the default period of events to show in the Event tab for users
or doors and zones. You can set the interface to show event details for 1 day, 3 days, or 1
week by default.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
34

2. Install the BioStar Software
To change the event view:
1.
From the menu bar, click View > Event View.
2.
Click type of event view to change (User or Doors/Zone).
3.
Click a default event period (1 day, 3 day, or 7 day).
2.6.4
Change Event Views
The fonts installed on the system can be used in BioStar in order to support various
languages. After changing the font, restart BioStar.
2.7
Migrate a Database from BioAdmin to BioStar
The BioStar installation program includes a database migration tool called BADB Conv.
This tool allows you to migrate an existing BioAdmin database to your new BioStar system.
When migrating a database, any identical information that exists in the BioStar database
will be overwritten. For example, if you have added a user to BioStar that previously existed
in BioAdmin, the user data will be overwritten with the information from the BioAdmin
database. For this reason, you should migrate your old database to BioStar before creating
new user accounts.
To migrate your information from BioAdmin to BioStar:
1.
Locate and run the migration program, BADBConv.exe. The location of this program is
Window’s Start > All Programs > BioStar 1.92 > Server Service > BADBConv.
2.
Click Yes to acknowledge the warning dialogue that appears to remind you that
identical information in BioStar will be overwritten.
3.
Click Start to begin the migration. When the process is complete, the Convert DB
dialog box will show the types of data that have been migrated.
4.
Click Close to exit the migration tool.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
35
3. Setup the BioStar System
03
Setup the BioStar
System
This section describes how to add administrator accounts, devices, doors, zones, departments,
users, and access groups and setup time and attendance within the BioStar software. This
administrator's guide does not cover procedures for installing physical components, wiring doors
and devices, or connecting devices to networks. For more information about hardware installation
and physical configuration of your access control system, please refer to the installation guides that
accompany your access control devices.
3.1
Create Administrative Accounts
Before adding users, it is a good idea to add and configure accounts for system
administrators and operators. It is also useful to understand some general concepts
regarding administration of the BioStar system.
3.1.1
Administrative Levels
BioStar allows for multiple levels of administration, operation, and interaction with the
system. Each administrative level has varying degrees of privileges and access to the
system menus (User, Doors, Visual Map, Access Control, Monitoring, Devices, and Time &
Attendance). The BioStar system includes three preset administrator levels in addition to
custom administrator levels:

Administrator

Operator

Manager

Custom administrator levels
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
36
3. Setup the BioStar System
Administrators are capable of adding and configuring devices, users, doors, zones, and
access groups. They also can manage time and attendance functions, including setting up
time categories, daily schedules, shifts, holiday rules, and leave periods, as well as creating,
modifying, and viewing time and attendance reports. In addition, administrators can create
custom administrator levels that are granted various privileges for the BioStar system
menus.
Operators can monitor and manage the BioStar system via a remote client terminal.
Operators have the same privileges with administrators, other than the privileges to create
and delete other administrator or operator accounts. Like administrators, operators are
capable of adding and configuring devices, users, doors, zones, and access groups. They
also can manage time and attendance functions, including setting up time categories, daily
schedules, shifts, holiday rules, and leave periods, as well as creating, modifying, and
viewing time and attendance reports.
Managers have privileges to read all information in the menus. However, they cannot
create, modify, or delete anything in the menus. Depending on your organization’s
requirements, the capability to view events may be useful for other management purposes.
The custom administrator level can be assigned full or limited privileges on the seven
menus. On each menu, you can assign one of three privileges: All Rights, Modify, or Read.
Depending on your organization’s requirements, the BioStar system can be managed more
effectively by adding custom administrator levels.
A typical setup will consist of one administrator (or more, depending on the size of your
organization) who has full access to the system. Below the administrator level, several
operators may perform various functions, such as remotely controlling doors and locks,
adding users, registering fingerprints, issuing access cards, adding access groups, defining
timezones, and configuring alarm events.
3.1.2
Add and Customize Administrative Accounts
By default, BioStar includes one administrator account, which is added when you install the
software (see section 2.3). You may choose to use this account as the sole administrator
and grant operator privileges to all other users who will manage the system or you may
choose to add multiple administrators to the system.
3.1.2.1
Add an administrative account
To add an administrative account:
1.
From the menu bar, click Administrator > Admin Account to open the Admin
Account List dialog box.
2.
Click Add New Administrator.
3.
In the Add New Administrator dialog box, enter an Admin ID and password.
4.
Confirm the password by retyping it and select an Admin Level from the
drop-down list:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
37
3. Setup the BioStar System

Administrator: all privileges.

Operator: all privileges, other than creating or deleting administrator or
operator accounts.
Manager: privilege to read all information.

5.
Click OK.
3.1.2.2
Change an administrative account level or password
If you accidentally set the wrong level for an administrative account or need to
change or reset a password, you can do so from the Administrator menu.
To change an administrative level or password:
1.
From the menu bar, click Administrator > Admin Account to open the Admin
Account List dialog box.
2.
Click an admin account in the list on the left side of the dialog box.
3.
Click Modify Level/Password. This will open the Modify Administrator dialog
box.
4.
Edit the account information as required:
To change the administrative level, choose a new level from the drop-

down list.
To change the password, type a new password in both the New

Password and Confirm boxes.
5.
Click OK to save the changes.
3.1.2.3
Create a custom administration level
If you need to define a specific administrator role with particular privileges, you
can add a custom administrator level. You can allow full or limited access to any
of BioStar’s seven menus for the custom administrator level: User, Doors, Visual
Map, Access Control, Monitoring, Devices, and Time & Attendance.
The custom administrator level can be assigned privileges for specific users and
devices. A custom administrator will have the privileges you assign (All Rights,
Modify, or Read) only for those users or devices that you specify and will not be
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
38
3. Setup the BioStar System
allowed to view or modify other users or devices. While you are creating a custom
administrator level, in the User menu, you can grant privileges for users in a
department and its sub departments. However, ensure that you do not select
individual users, but rather the first-level or second-level departments they belong
to.
In the Device menu, you can grant privileges for specific devices. If a device has a
slave device connected, the privileges for the host device will also apply to the
slave device. Users and devices that are not selected in the User and Device
menus will not appear in the Doors, Visual Map, Access Control, Monitoring, and
Time and Attendance menus. If a door or zone is associated with devices that are
not granted privileges, the door or zone will not appear in the Door menu.
To create a custom administrator level:
1.
From the menu bar, click Administrator > Admin Account to open the Admin
Account List dialog box.
2.
Click Custom Level Setting.
3.
From the Custom Level List dialog box, click Add Custom Level. This will
open the Add/Modify Custom Level dialog box.
4.
Type a name for the custom level in the Name field.
5.
If desired, add an additional description in the Description field.
6.
Select a menu from the drop-down list.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
39
3. Setup the BioStar System
7.
When selecting the User Menu or Device Menu, select users or devices to
grant access privileges by clicking the checkboxes in the users or devices
list.
8.
Select a permission level (All Rights, Modify, or Read) by clicking the
checkbox next to an option.
9.
Click Add to include the permission in the custom level.
10. Repeat steps 6-9 as necessary to add other permissions.
11. When you are finished customizing the level, click Save.
You can now create new administrative accounts with any of the custom
administrator levels you have created.
3.2
Setup Devices
This section describes how to use BioStar's device wizard to search for and add new
devices, as well as how to add 3rd party RF devices. In addition, the procedures that follow
describe basic configuration of devices within the BioStar system. For more information
about configuring devices, see sections 3.10.3 and 5.1.
3.2.1
Search for and Add Devices
BioStar includes a handy wizard for finding and adding devices. Before starting a search
for new devices, verify the device connections. If you have multiple devices to add, it may
be helpful to prepare a list of device locations, IDs, and IP addresses prior to adding them.
To search for devices and add them to the BioStar system:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the Task pane, click Add Device.
3.
When the wizard appears, click the option button next to a connection type:

LAN: Choose this option to search for devices connected via Ethernet or Wireless
LAN.

Serial: Choose this option to search for devices connected to a client PC via
RS485 and RS232 or slave devices connected via RS485 to another device that is
connected to a client PC (see section 3.2.2).

USB Device: Choose this option to search for devices connected via USB ports.

Virtual USB Device: choose this option to search for virtual devices that you have
added to a USB drive.
!
Attention: BioStar versions 1.3 and higher include a USB driver, which enables the
connection of BioStation in Windows 7. This driver is not compatible with a previous
version of BioStar. If a previous version of BioStar is used, install the correct USB driver.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
40
3. Setup the BioStar System
4.
Click Next.
5.
For USB or Virtual USB searches, skip to step 7. If you are searching for devices
connected via LAN or serial ports, set advanced search criteria:

LAN: Select whether to search for devices using TCP or UDP protocols. When
you select TCP, you can specify an IP address range, the type of device you are
searching for (BioStation/X-Station/BioStation T2/FaceStation: 1470, BioEntry
Plus/BioEntry W/BioLite Net/Xpass/Xpass S2: 1471, BioStation A2/BioStation
2/BioStation L2/BioEntry W2: 51212 or Custom: enter manually), and the port to
search with. If you select UDP, you can search for devices only in the same
subnet.

Serial: Specify a COM port (or select All port) and a baud rate. You can connect
up to 31 devices per COM port via RS485. If the RS485 cable is too long, the
signal may be weakened. In this case, you should install a terminating resistance
at both ends of the bus by turning on the Dip Switch on your device for normal
signal transmission. On the other hand, if the cable is too short, the resistance
may interrupt signal transmission. Therefore, by considering the length of the
cable and the signal status, select whether to turn on or off the terminating
resistance switch.
Note: The RS485 mode setting is different between a 1.x device and a 2.x device. Disable,
Host, Slave and PC Connection can be used for a 1.x device, and Default, Host, and Slave
can be used for a 2.x device.
If Default is set as the RS485 mode for a 2.x device, one door can be configured with one
device. In order to configure one door with two devices such as the Anti-passback zone,
the RS485 mode should be changed to Host or Slave.
Also, when a device whose Default is set as the RS485 mode is connected to the host
device using a RS485 cable, it can be searched as a slave device in the BioStar.
6.
Click Next.
7.
When BioStar completes the search, you can specify network settings as described
below. Click a device name in the list on the left and then configure the settings as
required:
Note: If you change the network settings for a device at this point, the device will be
removed from the device list. To add the device in the following steps, you must search for
the device again.
You need not and should not add devices with server mode. The devices will connect to the
server by themselves, and will be listed under the BioStar Server on the Device Tree dialog
box. If you are trying to add devices with server mode, the process will fail.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
41
3. Setup the BioStar System

DHCP or Static IP: If you choose to use the DHCP option, the device will
automatically acquire network settings from the DHCP server. If you do not use
DHCP, you must configure the network settings manually.

Direct connection: This is the default connection option. With this option, the
BioStar client will connect directly to the device. If you choose this type of
connection, the BioStar client must be running to retrieve the log records from
the device.

Server connection: If you choose this option, the device will automatically
connect to the BioStar server. If you configure the server IP address and port
correctly, log records from the device will be gathered at the server, regardless of
whether or not the BioStar client is online. This option may also be useful if your
network configuration requires you to connect devices with private IP addresses
(for example, over a WAN) to a server with a public IP address. This option also
provides SSL encryption for BioStation devices.
8.
Click Next.
9.
Select the device or devices to add by clicking the checkboxes next to the device IDs.
10. Click Add to add the devices to the BioStar system.
11. Close the confirmation message that appears and click Finish to exit the wizard.
Note: You can manage devices by group by creating a tree hierarchy of named groups and
assigning devices into one of the groups. Groups are created by right-clicking on the
desired position in the device tree and selecting Add Group. You can drag and drop devices
between different locations of groups. Groups can be nested four levels deep and a pair of
host-slave devices moves together.
3.2.2
Search for and Add Slave Devices
A distinctive feature of BioStar is that it supports host and slave devices in RS485
networks. With this feature, only the host device must be connected to a PC via the LAN.
The network can then be easily expanded by adding slave devices via RS485 connections.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
42
3. Setup the BioStar System
This feature also allows for controlling elevator (lift) access with BioEntry Plus, Xpass and
Xpass S2 devices that are connected to LIFT I/O devices.
If your configuration includes slave devices, you must perform an additional search to
locate and add those devices.
First, configure the host device:
1.
Search for and add the host device as described in section 3.2.1.
2.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
3.
In the navigation pane, click the host device.
4.
In the device pane, click the Network tab.
5.
Change the RS485 serial setting by selecting Host from the Mode drop-down list.
6.
Click Apply to save the change.
Next, search for and add slave devices:
1.
In the navigation pane, right-click the host device and click Add Device (Serial). This
will open the Search and Add Device dialog box.
2.
Click Next to begin the search.
3.
When BioStar completes the search, click Next.
4.
Select the device or devices to add by clicking the checkboxes next to the device IDs.
5.
Click Add to add the device
6.
Close the confirmation message that appears and click Finish to exit the wizard.
7.
In the navigation pane, click the slave device.
8.
In the device pane, click the Network tab.
9.
Change the RS485 serial setting by selecting Slave from the Mode drop-down list.
10. Click Apply to save the change.
3.2.3
Add an RF Device
Prior to BioStar 1.2, third-party RF devices connected to Suprema devices (BioStation,
BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, and BioLite Net devices), operated only as physical extensions to
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
43
3. Setup the BioStar System
the Suprema devices. As of BioStar 1.2, third-party RF devices connected to Suprema
devices function independently and can be associated with doors and included in zones.
To add an RF device:
1.
Connect the RF device to a Suprema device.
2.
Ensure that the Suprema device is added to the BioStar system (see section 3.2.1).
3.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
4.
In the navigation pane, click the Suprema device name.
5.
Click the Wiegand tab and specify Wiegand settings as described below.
b. Select Extended in the Wiegand Mode drop-down list.
c. Select Wiegand (Card) in the Wiegand Input drop-down list.
d. Click Apply at the bottom of the pane.
6.
In the navigation pane, right-click the BioStation device name and then click Add RF
Device.
Note: For more information about using your third-party RF device, consult the user
guidance for the RF device. The Wiegand format must be configured properly to ensure
compatibility with third-party RF devices.
3.2.4
Connect a Device via Wireless LAN
Certain BioStation devices (BSTW-OC, BSTW-TC, BSRW-OC, BSRW-TC) and
BioStation T2, FaceStation, BioStation A2, BioStation 2 support wireless LAN
connections.
To configure the settings for a wireless LAN connection:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
44
3. Setup the BioStar System
2.
Click a device name in the navigation pane.
3.
Click the Network tab in the Device pane.
4.
Select “Wireless LAN” in the Lan Type drop-down list.
5.
Select one of the preset configurations in the WLAN section (Preset #1 ~
Preset #4).
6.
Click Change Setting in the WLAN section. If you choose to use ‘Preset #1 or
#2, the following figures will appear.
[Wireless LAN-supported BioStation models]
[BioStation A2, BioStation 2, BioStation T2 and FaceStation]
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
45
3. Setup the BioStar System
7.
Optional: If you choose to configure your own wireless LAN by selecting
Preset #3 or #4, then specify the following options.

Preset Name: Enter a name for the wireless LAN that the device will be
connected to.

ESSID: Enter the unique ID of the access point.

Network Authentication: Select a network authentication mode from the
drop-down list (Open System, Shared Key, or WPA-PSK). The
authentication mode must be the same for the device and the access
point.

Encryption Strength: Select an encryption strength from the drop-down
list (available options depend on network authentication setting).

Network Key: Enter the network key. ‘_suprema_wpa_’ is a pre-defined
value for Preset #1 networks (biostation_wpa, biostar_wpa), and
‘_suprema_wep_’ is for Preset #2 networks (biostation_wep,
biostar_wep).

8.
3.2.5
Confirm Key: re-enter the network key.
Click OK to save your changes.
Configure a BioStation Device
This section provides an overview of configuring BioStation devices to work with the
BioStar software. For more information, refer to the installation guides that accompany
your devices.
To configure a BioStation device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Double-click a BioStation device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device
pane similar to the one below:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
46
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, please see section 5.1.1.

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC
and adjust settings for operation modes.

Fingerprint: Use this tab to specify security, quality, matching, and timeout
settings for fingerprint recognition.

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.

Input: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.

Output: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete output settings for the device.

Black List: Use this tab to block access through a particular card, e.g. a card
which has been stolen or used by a former employee. You can use this feature
only when the card mode of the device is set to 'Template on Card'. Adding a
user ID or card ID denies access from the users with the matching ID or card.

Display/Sound: Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.

T&A: Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.16.
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
47
3. Setup the BioStar System
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box.
3.2.6
Configure a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W Device
To configure a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device pane
similar to the one below:
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, see section 5.1.2.

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC,
adjust settings for operation modes, and adjust options for fingerprint
recognition.

Fingerprint: Use this tab to specify security, quality, matching, and timeout
settings for fingerprint recognition.

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits, access groups, and time
and attendance mode settings.

Input: Use this tab to add or modify inputs to the device.

Output: Use this tab to add or modify outputs from the device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
48
3. Setup the BioStar System

Black List: Use this tab to block access through a particular card, e.g. a card
which has been stolen or used by a former employee. You can use this feature
only when the card mode of the device is set to 'Template on Card'. Adding a
user ID or card ID denies access from the users with the matching ID or card.

Command Card: Use this tab to issue command cards that can control BioEntry
Plus or BioEntry W devices. For more information about issuing command cards,
see section 3.2.6.1.

Display/Sound: Use this tab to configure LED & Buzzer settings according to the
event or status.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.1.16.
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box.
3.2.6.1
Issue command cards
Command cards allow you to enroll and delete users directly from a BioEntry Plus
or BioEntry W device. For more information about enrolling users via command
cards, see section 3.6.2.3. For more information about delete an individual or all
users via command cards, see section 4.5.1.1 and 4.5.1.2.
To issue command cards:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click the name of a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W
device.
3.
Click the Command Card tab in the Device pane.
Click Read Card.
3.2.7
4.
Place a command card on the device.
5.
Select a command type from the drop-down list.
6.
If desired, set the command card to require administrator authentication by
clicking the checkbox next to the option.
7.
Click Add.
Configure a BioLite Net Device
To configure a BioLite Net device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device pane
similar to the one below:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
49
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, see section 5.1.3.

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC,
adjust settings for operation modes, and adjust options for fingerprint
recognition.

Fingerprint: Use this tab to specify security, quality, matching, and timeout
settings for fingerprint recognition.

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits and access groups.

Input: Use this tab to add or modify inputs to the device.

Output: Use this tab to add or modify outputs from the device.

Black List: Use this tab to block access through a particular card, e.g. a card
which has been stolen or used by a former employee. You can use this feature
only when the card mode of the device is set to 'Template on Card'. Adding a
user ID or card ID denies access from the users with the matching ID or card.

Display/Sound: Use this tab to configure LED & Buzzer according to the event or
status.

T&A: Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.16.
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
50
3. Setup the BioStar System
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others, select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box, and click Apply.
3.2.8
Configure an Xpass or Xpass S2 Device
To configure an Xpass or Xpass S2 device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device pane
similar to the one below:
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, see section 5.1.4 (Xpass) or 5.1.5 (Xpass S2).

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC,
adjust settings for operation modes, and adjust settings for card ID formats.
Xpass S2 device do not support the Mifare template cards.

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits and access groups.

Input: Use this tab to add or modify inputs to the device.

Output: Use this tab to add or modify outputs from the device.

Command Card: Use this tab to issue command cards that can control Xpass or
Xpass S2 devices. For more information about issuing command cards, see
section 3.2.8.1.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
51
3. Setup the BioStar System

Display/Sound: Use this tab to configure LED & Buzzer according to the event or
status.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.16.
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others, select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box, and click Apply.
3.2.8.1
Issue command cards
Command cards allow you to enroll and delete users directly from an Xpass or
Xpass S2 devices. For more information about enrolling users via command
cards, see section 3.6.2.3. For more information about deleting an individual or all
users via command cards, see section 4.5.1.1 and 4.5.1.2.
To issue command cards:
3.2.9
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click the name of an Xpass device.
3.
Click the Command Card tab in the Device pane.
4.
Click Read Card.
5.
Place a command card on the device.
6.
Select a command type from the drop-down list.
7.
If desired, set the command card to require administrator authentication by
clicking the checkbox next to the option.
8.
Click Add.
Configure an X-Station Device
To configure an X-Station device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
52
3. Setup the BioStar System
2.
Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device pane
similar to the one below:
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, see section 5.1.7.

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC
and adjust settings for operation modes.

Camera: Use this tab to assign events, by timezone, that can be performed via
the camera and the face detection feature.

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.

Input: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.

Output: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete output settings for the device.

Black List: Use this tab to block access through a particular card, e.g. a card
which has been stolen or used by a former employee. You can use this feature
only when the card mode of the device is set to 'Template on Card'. Adding a
user ID or card ID denies access from the users with the matching ID or card.

Display/Sound: Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.

T&A: Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.16.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
53
3. Setup the BioStar System
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box.
3.2.10 Configure a BioStation T2 Device
To configure a BioStation T2 device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device pane
similar to the one below:
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, see section 5.1.7.

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC
and adjust settings for operation modes.

Fingerprint: Use this tab to specify security, quality, matching, and timeout
settings for fingerprint recognition.

Camera: Use this tab to assign events, by timezone, that can be performed via
the camera and the face detection feature.

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
54
3. Setup the BioStar System

Interphone: Use this tab to set the device to act as an interphone which allows
communication between people on either side of the door.

Input: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.

Output: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete output settings for the device.

Black List: Use this tab to block access through a particular card, e.g. a card
which has been stolen or used by a former employee. You can use this feature
only when the card mode of the device is set to 'Template on Card'. Adding a
user ID or card ID denies access from the users with the matching ID or card.

Display/Sound: Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.

T&A: Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.16.
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
55
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.2.11 Configure a FaceStation Device
To configure a FaceStation device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device pane
similar to the one below:
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, see section 5.1.8

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC
and adjust settings for operation modes.

Face – Use this tab to specify security level and enrollment sensitivity settings
for face recognition.

Camera: Use this tab to assign events, by timezone, that can be performed via
the camera and the face detection feature.

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.

Interphone : Use this tab to set the device to act as an interphone which allows
communication between people on either side of the door.

Input: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.

Output: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete output settings for the device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
56
3. Setup the BioStar System

Display/Sound: Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.

T&A: Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.163.2.16.
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box.
3.2.12 Configure a BioStation 2 Device
To configure a BioStation 2 device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device pane
similar to the one below:
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, see section 5.1.9.

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC
and adjust settings for operation modes.

Fingerprint: Use this tab to specify security, quality, server matching, and timeout
settings for fingerprint recognition.

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
57
3. Setup the BioStar System

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.

Interphone: Use this tab to set the device to act as an interphone which allows
communication between people on either side of the door.

Input: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.

Black List: Use this tab to block access through a particular card, e.g. a card
which has been stolen or used by a former employee. You can use this feature
only when the card mode of the device is set to 'Template on Card'. Adding a
user ID or card ID denies access from the users with the matching ID or card.

Display/Sound: Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.

T&A: Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.16.
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box.
3.2.13 Configure a BioStation A2 Device
To configure a BioStation A2 device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device pane
similar to the one below:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
58
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, see section 5.1.10.

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC
and adjust settings for operation modes.

Fingerprint: Use this tab to specify security, quality, server matching, and timeout
settings for fingerprint recognition.

Camera: Use this tab to assign events, by timezone, that can be performed via
the camera and the face detection feature.

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.

Interphone: Use this tab to set the device to act as an interphone which allows
communication between people on either side of the door.

Input: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.

Black List: Use this tab to block access through a particular card, e.g. a card
which has been stolen or used by a former employee. You can use this feature
only when the card mode of the device is set to 'Template on Card'. Adding a
user ID or card ID denies access from the users with the matching ID or card.

Display/Sound: Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.

T&A: Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.16.
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
59
3. Setup the BioStar System
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box.
3.2.14 Configure a BioStation L2 Device
To configure a BioStation L2 device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device pane
similar to the one below:
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, see section 5.1.11.

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC
and adjust settings for operation modes.

Fingerprint: Use this tab to specify security, quality, server matching, and timeout
settings for fingerprint recognition.

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.

Interphone: Use this tab to set the device to act as an interphone which allows
communication between people on either side of the door.

Input: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.

Black List: Use this tab to block access through a particular card, e.g. a card
which has been stolen or used by a former employee. You can use this feature
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
60
3. Setup the BioStar System
only when the card mode of the device is set to 'Template on Card'. Adding a
user ID or card ID denies access from the users with the matching ID or card.

Display/Sound: Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.

T&A: Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.16.
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box.
3.2.15 Configure a BioEntry W2 Device
To configure a BioEntry W2 device:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device pane
similar to the one below:
3.
Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of device
settings, see section 5.1.12.

Operation Mode: Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a host PC
and adjust settings for operation modes.

Fingerprint: Use this tab to specify security, quality, server matching, and timeout
settings for fingerprint recognition.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
61
3. Setup the BioStar System

Network: Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.

Access Control: Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.

Interphone: Use this tab to set the device to act as an interphone which allows
communication between people on either side of the door.

Input: Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.

Black List: Use this tab to block access through a particular card, e.g. a card
which has been stolen or used by a former employee. You can use this feature
only when the card mode of the device is set to 'Template on Card'. Adding a
user ID or card ID denies access from the users with the matching ID or card.

Display/Sound: Use this tab to configure LED & Buzzer settings according to the
event or status.

T&A: Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.

Wiegand: Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more information
about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.16.
4.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
5.
To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select other
devices from the Device Tree dialog box.
3.2.16 Change Wiegand Formats
From the BioStar interface, you can configure the Wiegand format of a device to control
device inputs and outputs.
To configure the Wiegand format:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a device name.
3.
Click the Wiegand tab in the Device pane.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
62
3. Setup the BioStar System
4.
Click Change Format. This will open the Wiegand Configuration wizard.
5.
Click a option button to select one of the following formats:

26-bit Standard: This format is the most widely used and consists of an 8-bit FC
code and a 16-bit ID. You cannot change the bit definition of the format or the
parity bits of this format.

Pass-through: Use this format to customize only the ID bits. During verification,
if the ID is recognized, the Wiegand input string will pass through in its original
form. You cannot set the parity bits or alternative values of this format. By
definition, the pass-through format is useful only when the operation mode is
one-to-one (1: 1). In one-to-many (1: N) mode, non-ID bits are set to 0. Passthrough is not supported for BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation L2 and
BioEntry W2.

Custom: With a custom format, you can define the ID bits, parity bits, and
alternative values.
6.
Use the Wiegand Configuration wizard to customize the Wiegand format to your
specifications (see the subsections that follow for more information).
7.
When you have completed making changes with the wizard, click Apply to save your
changes.
3.2.16.1
Configure a 26-bit Wiegand format
When you select a 26-bit format, the only thing you can customize is the FC Code:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
63
3. Setup the BioStar System
1.
After selecting the format in the wizard, click Next until you reach the
Alternative Value dialog box.
2.
Click the FC Code checkbox and enter a new FC Code.
3.
Click Finish to close the wizard.
3.2.16.2
Configure a pass-through Wiegand format
When you select a pass-through format, you can alter the total number of bits and
assign the ID bits:
1.
After selecting the format in the wizard, click Next to advance to the Wiegand
Configuration - Format dialog box.
2.
If desired, enter a new total number of bits and click Apply.
3.
Click the User ID button (I) on the right.
4.
Assign ID bits by clicking the appropriate squares.
5.
Click Next until you reach the Wiegand Configuration - Alternative Value
dialog box.
6.
Click Finish to close the wizard.
3.2.16.3
Configure a custom Wiegand format
It is able to change entire bit numbers and parity bit numbers, allocate ID bit and
custom ID bit section, define parity bit, and set alternative values for specific output
data section by selecting user custom Wiegand type.
Configure a custom Wiegand format
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
64
3. Setup the BioStar System
1.
After selecting the format in the wizard, click Next to advance to the
Wiegand Configuration - Format dialog box.
2.
If desired, enter a new total number of bits and click Apply.
3.
If parity settings have changed, click the Reset parity button.
4.
Click the User ID button (I) on the right and assign ID bits by clicking the
appropriate squares.
5.
Click the Custom ID button on the right, and then click the square, and set the
area for custom ID bit.
6.
Click the Even Parity button (E) on the right and assign an even parity bit by
clicking on the appropriate squares.
7.
Click the Odd Parity button (O) on the right and assign an odd parity bit by
clicking on the appropriate squares.
8.
Click Next.
9.
In the Wiegand Configuration - Parity dialog box, select the bits that will be
used to calculate the first parity bit.
10. As necessary, click >> and select the bits that will be used to calculate
additional parity bits. You must perform this step for each parity bit you
assigned in steps 4 and 5. If necessary, you can click Initialize to reset the
selection.
11. Click Next.
12. In the Wiegand Configuration - Alternative Value dialog box, select a field to
customize (non-ID bits only).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
65
3. Setup the BioStar System
13. Click the Alt Value checkbox and enter a new value for the output string.
14. Repeat steps 10-11 as necessary to customize the rest of the output string.
15. Click Finish to close the wizard.
3.3
Setup Doors
This section describes how to setup doors within the BioStar system. For information
about installing physical devices and integrating them with door components, refer to the
user guide that accompanies each device.
!
Attention: A 2.x device (BioStation A2, BioStation 2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2) cannot
configure the door together with a 1.x device (BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W,
BioLite Net, Xpass, Xpass S2, X-Station, BioStation T2, FaceStation).
3.3.1
Add a Door
To add a door:
1.
Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Add New Door.
3.
Right-click New Door, click Rename, and type a name for the door.
3.3.2
Associate a Device With a Door
BioStar allows you to associate a maximum of two devices with each door. When using
two devices on a door, the devices should be connected to each other via RS485. See
section 5.2 for an explanation of door settings.
To associate a device with a door:
1.
Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
Right-click a door and click Add Device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
66
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.
Select a device from the Device Tree dialog box by clicking the checkbox next to a
device name.
4.
Click OK.
3.3.3
Configure a Door
1.
Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
Click the name of a door in the navigation pane. This will open a Doors pane similar to
the one below:
3.
Configure door information on the following tabs. For an explanation of door settings,
see section 5.2.

Details: Use this tab to control the interaction between doors, devices, locks, and
exit buttons. If you add two devices to a door, you can also use this tab to
configure anti-passback settings.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
67
3. Setup the BioStar System

Alarm: Use this tab to specify what actions to take when the door is forced open
or held open.
4.

Zone: Use this tab to see the zones associated with a door.

Access Control: Use this tab to see the access groups associated with a door.

Event: Use this tab to retrieve and monitor an event log for the door.
When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your changes.
3.3.4
Create a Door Group
You can create groups of doors for easier management.
3.4
1.
Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, right-click Doors and click Add Door Group.
3.
Type a name for the group and press Enter.
4.
To add a door to the group, click and drag a door to the group.
Setup Elevators (Lifts)
This section describes how to setup elevators within the BioStar system. For information
about installing physical devices and integrating them with elevator components, refer to
the user guide that accompanies each device. BioStar supports up to 120 elevators (lifts).
3.4.1
Add an Elevator
To add an elevator:
1.
Click Lift in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Add New Lift.
3.
Right-click New Lift, click Rename, and type a name for the elevator.
3.4.2
Associate a Device With an Elevator
BioStar allows you to associate Xpass or Xpass S2 devices with a LIFT I/O device to
control access to elevators. The LIFT I/O device must be connected to the BioEntry Plus,
Xpass or Xpass S2 device via RS485.
To associate an Xpass or Xpass S2 device with an elevator:
1.
Click Lifts in the shortcut pane.
2.
Right-click an elevator name and click Add Reader.
3.
Select an Xpass or Xpass S2 device from the Device Tree dialog box by clicking the
checkbox next to a device name.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
68
3. Setup the BioStar System
4.
Click OK.
3.4.3
Configure an Elevator
1.
Click Lifts in the shortcut pane.
2.
Click the name of an elevator in the navigation pane. This will open a Lifts pane
similar to the one below:
3.
Configure elevator information in the following fields:


Lift IO: Select a LIFT I/O device to view and change settings.
Relay Duration: Relay Duration is supported in the Detail tab of Lift IO. Default
setting range is 10 seconds, and you can set min. 1 second to max. 60 seconds.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
69
3. Setup the BioStar System
Supported by latest regular firmware among Xpass and BioEntry Plus supporting
LIFT IO.
Note: Supported Firmware Versions: BioEntry Plus 1.6, Xpass 1.3

Output: This field lists the avaialble outputs of the LIFT I/O device.

Floor: Use this tab to see the zones associated with a door.

Not Use: Select the checkbox when you do not use the output port of the LIFT I/O
device. Clear the checkbox to control aceess to floors by associating outputs
with floors.
4.
When you are finished configuring the elevator, click Apply to save your changes.
3.4.4
Add Users to an Elevator
1.
Click Lifts in the shortcut pane.
2.
Click the name of an elevator in the navigation pane.
3.
Click Lift Manage Users in the shortcut pane. This will open the Lift Manage User
dialog box.
4.
In the left pane, click a user’s name.
5.
In the right pane, click the checkboxes next to floors that you wish to assign the user
to.
6.
Click Apply to save your chagnes.
3.4.5
!
Transfer Settings to an Elevator
Attention: When using BioEntry Plus, Xpass or Xpass S2 devices as lift readers,
transferring settings to the device with the User menu will reset all of the settings and
user data stored on the device. To preserve the settings, use the Transfer to Device
function in the Lift menu instead.
To send settings and user data to an Xpass or Xpass S2 device:
1.
Click Lifts in the shortcut pane.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
70
3. Setup the BioStar System
2.
Click Transfer to Device in the task pane. This will open the Lift Tree dialog box.
3.
In the lift tree, select a device or devices by clicking the checkboxes next to device
names.
4.
3.5
Click Apply to send the elevator settings to the selected devices.
Setup Zones
BioStar allows you to provide sophisticated access control with multiple zones. Zones can
be used to control the behavior of devices, doors, and other components. In addition, zones
can be configured to provide different types of restrictions, such as anti-passback, timed
anti-passback, and entrance limits. The sections below describe how to determine which
zones to use and how to add and configure zones.
!
Attention: A 2.x device (BioStation A2, BioStation 2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2) cannot
configure a zone together with a 1.x device (BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, BioLite
Net, Xpass, Xpass S2, X-Station, BioStation T2, FaceStation). Also, BioStation A2,
BioStation 2, BioStation L2 and BioEntry W2 can configure only an anti-passback zone
and a fire alarm zone.
3.5.1
Determine Which Zones to Use
In total, the BioStar system supports seven types of zones:

Access zone: Use this zone to synchronize user or log information. If you select the
user synchronization option, user data enrolled at the devices will be automatically
propagated to other connected devices. If you select the log synchronization option, all
log records will be written to the master device (in addition to the server), so that you
can check log records of member devices. For information about customizing access
zones, see section 5.3.5.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
71
3. Setup the BioStar System

Anti-passback zone: Use this zone to prevent a user from passing his or her card back
to another person or using his or her fingerprint to allow someone else to gain entry.
The zone supports two types of anti-passback restrictions: soft and hard. When a user
violates the anti-passback protocol, the soft restriction will record the action in the
user's log. The hard restriction will deny access and record the event in the log when
the anti-passback protocol is violated. For information about customizing antipassback zones, see section 5.3.1.

Entrance limit zone: Use this zone to restrict the number of times a user can enter an
area. The entrance limit can be tied to a timezone, so that a user is restricted to a
maximum number of entries during a specified time span. You can also set time limits
for reentry to enforce a timed anti-passback restriction. For information about
customizing entrance limit zones, see section 5.3.2.

Alarm zone: Use this zone to group inputs from multiple devices into a single alarm
zone. Devices in the alarm zone can be simultaneously armed or disarmed via an arm
or disarm card or a key. For more information about configuring alarm zones, see
sections 3.5.2.4, 3.5.2.5, 3.5.2.6 and 5.3.3.

Fire alarm zone: Use this zone to control how doors will respond during a fire. External
inputs can be fed into the BioStar system to automatically trigger door releases or
perform other actions. For more information about customizing fire alarm zones, see
section 5.3.4.

Muster zone: Use this zone to monitor and track employees during an emergency or to
perform a “roll call” where employees are required to be present in a particular area at
a particular time. Muster zone allows administrators to determine if any employee has
not reported to the muster area and, if any employee is unaccounted for, take the
necessary actions to locate them. For more information about customizing muster
zone, see section 5.3.6.

Interlock zone: Use this zone to create an interlock area with two doors equipped with
devices. When an external input indicates that one door is open, the other door is
automatically locked to provide a secure interlock area. A reader-equipped door that
does not belong to any other zone can be used to create up to four interlock zones
(four zones maximum per reader). For more information about configuring an interlock
zone, see section 5.3.7.
3.5.2
Add and Configure Zones
When you add a zone, you can use the four tabs in the Zone pane to configure the zone. For
an explanation of zone settings, see section 5.3.

Details: Add devices and specify inputs or other parameters for a zone.

Alarm: Specify alarm actions and outputs.

Access Group: Apply access groups to a zone (not available for fire alarm zones).

Event: View events associated with a zone.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
72
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.5.2.1
Add a zone
To add a new zone:
1.
Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, right-click Zone.
3.
Click Add Zone.
4.
Type a name for the zone in the Name field.
5.
Select a zone type from the drop-down list (see section 3.5.1 for zone
descriptions).
6.
Press OK. The Zone pane will appear on the right side of the screen.
3.5.2.2
Add a device to a zone
To implement the protocols of a zone, you must associate devices with the zone.
The Details tab (in the Zone pane) contains a Device List that shows each device
associated with a zone (see below).
!
Attention: BioStation A2, BioStation 2, BioStation L2 and BioEntry W2 can
configure only an anti-passback zone and a fire alarm zone.
To add a device to a zone:
1.
Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click the name of a zone.
3.
In the Zone tab, at the bottom of the Device List, click Add Device. This will
open the Add Device dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
73
3. Setup the BioStar System
4.
Select a device (or multiple devices) from the list and click >.

Anti-passback zones: When the Select Zone Attribute pop-up appears,
select an attribute from the drop-down list (In Device or Out Device).

Alarm zones: When the Select Zone Attribute/Type pop-up appears,
select a device attribute from the drop-down list (General, Arm, Disarm,
or Arm/Disarm). If you select an arm or disarm attribute (or Arm/Disarm),
click the Card or Key option button to specify how to arm or disarm
zones, and then press OK. For more information about arming or
disarming zones, see section 3.5.2.5.
5.
Press Save to add the devices to the list.
To check zones configured in each device:
1.
Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Manage Zone in Device. This will open the Select
Target Device dialog box.
3.
Click a device name in the list on the left to display zone information
contained in the device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
74
3. Setup the BioStar System
Yellow: Indicates that the configuration data in both the device and the

server are identical.
Red: Indicates that the configuration data in the device and the server are

different.
4.

Green: Indicates that the configuration data are stored to the device only.

Blue: Indicates that the configuration data are stored to the server only.
Optional: To delete all zones from the device, select a device and click Delete
all zone in the lower-right corner of the screen.
3.5.2.3
Configure zone inputs
When adding devices to an alarm or fire alarm zone, you must also configure the
zone inputs.
To configure inputs:
1.
Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click the name of a zone.
3.
In the Zone tab, at the bottom of the Device List, click Add Input. This will
open the Add Zone Input dialog box.
4.
Type a name for the input in the Name field.
5.
Select a device from the drop-down list.
6.
Select one of the available inputs by clicking the checkbox next to the
appropriate input.
7.
Select the normal position of the input (N/O-normally open or N/C-normally
closed).
8.
Set the duration (in milliseconds) of the input signal.
9.
Click OK to add the input to the Input List.
3.5.2.4
Configure alarm actions and outputs
Configure alarm actions to specify what alerts to receive, if any, and which ports
and relays to use for alarm outputs. The Alarm tab (in the Zone pane) offers the
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
75
3. Setup the BioStar System
following options for all zones except access zones. For more information about
alarms, see sections 3.5.2.5 and 3.10.

Program Sound: Set a sound to be emitted by the software (at the host
computer or BioStar Server). To add custom sounds, please see section
3.10.1.2.

Device Sound: Set a sound to be emitted by a particular device.

Send Email: Create an email alert to send when an alarm is activated and
select recipients or email alerts. For more information about email alerts,
see section 3.10.2.

Output Device: Specify a device that will send an alarm signal to an external
device, such as an alarm siren.

Output Port: Specify the port to use for an output signal.

Output Signal: Specify a type of output signal.
3.5.2.5
Configure arm and disarm settings
After adding an alarm zone, you can configure the actions that will arm and
disarm the zone.
!
Attention: BioStation A2, BioStation 2, BioStation L2 and BioEntry W2 can
configure only an anti-passback zone and a fire alarm zone.
To configure arm and disarm settings:
1.
Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click the name of an alarm zone.
3.
Click the Details tab in the Zone pane.
4.
Click Setup to the right of Arm/Disarm Type. This will open the Arm/Disarm
Setting dialog box.
5.
To configure cards for arming or disarming zones:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
76
3. Setup the BioStar System
a.
b.
c.
d.
Select a device from the Read Device drop-down list.
Click Read Card. The LED on the device you selected will begin to flash.
Place the card on the device.
When the card has been read, click Add. The card can now be used to
arm or disarm devices in the alarm zone.
6.
To configure device keys for arming or disarming zones (BioStation devices
only):
a. Select a key that will arm devices from the first drop-down list.
b. Select a key that will disarm devices from the second drop-down list.
7.
When you are finished configuring the arm and disarm settings, click OK.
3.5.2.6
Configure external input/output settings
Instead of manually arming or disarming alarm zones, you can configure the
BioStar system to automatically determine when to arm or disarm alarm zones
based on the status of a specified input. You can also prevent the BioStar system
from arming an alarm zone when a monitored input is in a not-ready position.
Finally, you can configure the system to send a specified signal to an external
output when it arms or disarms alarm zones. External input/output settings are
available in BioStation V1.8, BioEntry Plus V1.4, BioEntry W V1.0, BioLite Net V1.2,
Xpass and Xpass S2 V1.0, X-Station V1.0, BioStation T2 and FaceStation V1.0 or
higher.
To configure external input/output settings:
1.
Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click the name of an alarm zone.
3.
Click the Details tab in the Zone pane.
4.
Click Setup to the right of External Input/Out. This will open the External I/O
Setting dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
77
3. Setup the BioStar System
5.
Configure the following input/output settings as desired:
 To prevent the BioStar system from arming an alarm zone:
a. Under External Sensor Status, select a device from the Device dropdown list.
b. Select an input from the Input drop-down list.
c. Select the position of the input (N/O – normally open or N/C – normally
closed) that will prevent the system from arming the alarm zone.
To allow the BioStar system to automatically arm or disarm an alarm

zone:
Under External Arm/Disarm, select a device from the Device drop-down
list.
b. Select an input from the Input drop-down list.
c. Select the position of the input (N/O – normally open or N/C – normally
closed) that will allow the system to arm the alarm zone. The other
position will allow the system to disarm the alarm zone.
a.
 To send an arm signal to an external device, such as an alarm signal:
a. Under Arm Status, select a device from the Device drop-down list.
b. Select a relay from the Relay drop-down list.
c. Select a type of signal from the Signal drop-down list.
d. Specify a priority level in the Priority field.
 To send a disarm signal to an external device, such as an alarm signal:
a. Under Disarm Status, select a device from the Device drop-down list.
b. Select a relay from the Relay drop-down list.
c. Select a type of signal from the Signal drop-down list.
d. Specify a priority level in the Priority field.
6.
When you are finished configuring the external input/output settings, click
OK.
3.5.2.7
Select access groups
The Access Group tab (in the Zone pane) allows you to specify access groups that
can bypass the normal restrictions set for the zone. For example, you may choose
a particular access group to be exempt from the restrictions of an anti-passback
zone. For alarm zones, this tab allows you to specify access groups that can arm
and disarm alarms. To select an access group, please click the checkbox next to a
group name and then click Apply.
3.5.2.8
View zone events
The Event tab (in the Zone pane) provides a listing of log events for a particular
zone. You can set a date range with the drop-down calendars and view a report of
events by clicking Get Log. For more information about monitoring and viewing
event logs, see section 4.1.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
78
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.6
Setup Users
You will need to use a fingerprint scanner to capture each user's fingerprints. For this
reason, it may be helpful to have a terminal connected to the system at a registration
center, such as a human resources or security office. BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W,
or BioLite Net devices can be used for fingerprint scanning when networked to the BioStar
server, or the BioMini USB device can be connected directly to a BioStar client to provide
convenient fingerprint scanning at a registration location.
When adding users, you will first need to create a user account. Once the account has been
created, you can register fingerprints and access cards or edit user details as desired.
3.6.1
Create a User Account
User data is controlled via a user account. You can create new accounts for users or
retrieve user data from a device. To retrieve user data from a device, please see section
3.6.5.3. To migrate user data from an existing BioAdmin database, see section 2.7.
To create a new department:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, right-click User that is top level of department and then click
Add Department.
3.
Enter a name for the department.
Note: Up to four department levels can be created.
To create new user accounts:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, right-click User or a department name and click Add User. This
will open a User pane similar to the one below.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
79
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.
Add details of the user's account in the User pane:

Name: Enter the user’s name.

Department: Enter a department or click the ellipsis button (...) to select from
departments you have added to the BioStar system.

Telephone: Enter the user’s telephone number (digits only—no characters are
allowed in this field).

E-mail: Enter the user’s email address.

Password: Enter the user’s password, if desired.
Note: Passwords saved in FaceStation devices are not compatible with other
devices. When transferring data from a FaceStation device to another type of
device, you must create new passwords for the other device.

Admin Level: Select the user’s BioStar administration level (Normal User or
Admin User).

ID: Enter an identification number for the user.

Start Date: Set a beginning date that the user can obtain authorization via the
BioStar system.

Expiry Date: Set a date that the user's account will expire (you can also specify
the hour that the account will expire).

Title: Select a title for the user (Guest, President, Director, General Manager,
Chief, Assistant Manager, or custom title).

Mobile: Enter a mobile telephone number for the user.

Gender: Select the user's gender.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
80
3. Setup the BioStar System

Date of Birth: Select the user's date of birth from the drop-down calendar.
Note: You can add a photo of the user or a private message by clicking Modify Private
Information.
4.
Register fingerprints (see section 3.6.2), face images (see section 3.6.3), and access
cards (see section 3.6.4) as necessary.
5.
When you are finished adding details to the user’s account, click Apply.
3.6.2
Register Fingerprints
BioStar provides an option for encrypting fingerprint templates. If you choose to use this
option, you should set the encryption before capturing fingerprint scans. Any previouslycaptured fingerprint templates will be rendered unusable when you activate the encryption.
For more information about encrypting fingerprints, see section 4.7.
When registering fingerprints, it is important to capture quality images. Before registering
fingerprints, ensure that the candidate's fingers are clean and dry. You may need to ask the
candidate to clean his or her fingers just prior to registration. If a candidate has excessively
dry skin, ask him or her to moisten the fingertips slightly by breathing warm air on them
just prior to registration.
When registering fingerprints, keep the following tips in mind:

You must register the same finger twice (two templates). You can register a total of
two fingers (a total of four templates) per user.

Fingers with scars, worn fingerprints, or other physical damage may be poor choices
for registration.

It may be necessary to delete and recapture an image of a fingerprint if the candidate
experiences low acceptance rates.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
81
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.6.2.1
Place fingers on the sensor
To ensure good quality fingerprints, candidates must place as much of the finger
pad (the soft part opposite the fingernail) on the sensor as possible. Suprema
recommends using index or middle fingers, because they are typically easier for
users to correctly place on the sensor. To properly place a finger on the sensor,
candidates should lay the finger flat, so that the pad side covers most of the
sensor and the finger is nearly perpendicular to the sensor.
The image below illustrates both correct and incorrect placement of a finger on
the sensor.
!
Attention: A fingerprint cannot be registered with a 2.x device connected as a
slave device.
3.6.2.2
Register fingerprints
BioStar allows you to register up to ten fingerprints per user. However, some
devices can only store a limited number of fingerprints:
Device
Number of Fingerprints
BioEntry Plus
BioEntry W
2
BioLite Net
BioStation
5
BioStation T2
BioStation A2
BioStation 2
10
BioStation L2
BioEntry W2
When fingerprints are distributed from BioStar, the device will receive the
maximum number of fingerprints, beginning with the first stored fingerprint scan.
If desired, one of the fingerprints can be used as a duress signal that will trigger
alarms when a candidate is forced to access an area. When registering duress
fingerprints, keep the following tips in mind:

A duress finger cannot be used for normal access

The duress finger should appear to be a natural choice (i.e., the little finger
is an unusual choice and may indicate to a perpetrator that the candidate
is triggering an alarm)
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
82
3. Setup the BioStar System
Candidates should be educated about what occurs when the duress finger

is used (e.g., the duress finger may trigger automatic door locks or silent
alarms).
To register fingerprints:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user’s name.
3.
Click the Fingerprints tab in the User pane.
4.
Select the device you will use for scanning fingerprints from the Enroll Device
drop-down list.
5.
Select a security level from the 1:1 Security Level drop-down list.
6.
Specify any of the following options, as desifred:

Enroll Quality: Set the quality of fingerprints to be enrolled to increase
authentification efficiency. The quality of a fingerprint is determined by
multiple factors incluing data on its minutiae distribution. You can
specify four values (20, 40, 60, 80) and selecting the higher numbers will
improve the quality of a fingerprint but can reduce the chances of a
fingerprint being enrolled. Please note that this option is only avaiable on
BioStar Standard Edition.

Show Fingerprint Image: Specify whether to display a fingerprint image
on the screen. Fingerprint images are not saved in the database of
BioStar server and you can only save individual images on your PC if
necessary.
7.
Click Add at the bottom right of the User pane to create an empty slot for
registering a fingerprint.
8.
In an empty finger slot, press Scan and then have the user place his or her
finger on the scanner twice, as prompted by the BioStar interface.
9.
If desired, click the checkbox next to the Duress option to set this fingerprint
as the duress signal.
10. Repeat steps 6-8 to register the rest of fingerprints.
11. Click Apply to save your changes.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
83
3. Setup the BioStar System
12. Validate the submitted fingerprints by clicking either one or both of the
following two options:
Verification Test: Compare a newly-scanned fingerprint to only the stored

fingerprint templated collected from a prior enrollment.
1: N Auth Test: Match a newly-scanned fingerprint against multiple

fingerprint templates stored in the server.
3.6.2.3
Enroll users via command cards
After issuing command cards, you can enroll users directly from a BioEntry Plus,
BioEntry W, or Xpass device. For more information about issuing command cards,
please see section 3.2.6.1 and 3.2.8.1.
To enroll a user on a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device via a command card:
1.
Place an enroll card (command card) on a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W
device.
2.
If authorization is required, an administrator must scan his or her fingerprint
to continue.
3.
To capture only fingerprints, have the user place his or her finger on the
scanner two times (as prompted by the device).
4.
To capture fingerprints and issue an access card, place the card on the
device first. Then, have the user place his or her finger on the scanner two
times (as prompted by the device).
To enroll a user on an Xpass device via a command card:
3.6.3
1.
Place an enroll card (command card) on an Xpass device.
2.
If authorization is required, an administrator must place his or her access
card on the device to continue.
3.
Place the user’s access card on the device.
4.
Place the enroll card again on the device to confirm the action.
Capture Face Images
With camera-equipped devices, such as FaceStation, you can capture images of users’
faces and use those images for authentication via BioStar’s face detection technology.
BioStar matches a still image of the user’s face during authentication with captured face
images in the BioStar server database. Face detection can be used simultaneously with
fingerprint recognition for highly secure biometric access control. For more information
about face detection settings, please see section 5.4.3.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
84
3. Setup the BioStar System
To capture face images with FaceSation devices:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user’s name.
3.
Click the Face tab in the User pane.
4.
Select the Enrollment Device you will use for capturing face images from the dropdown list.
5.
Click Add at the bottom right of the screen to add face(from the 1st Face to the 5th
Face).
Note: FaceStation supports up to 5 different user faces to ensure the most accurate face
detection at all times, regardless of the different hair styles, make-ups or eye glasses the
user might wear.
6.
Click the newly added face, click Capture, then follow the instructions prompted by the
enrollment device. Repeat steps 5~6 to add more faces.
7.
Click Use Profile Img to use the currently registered and selected face image as the
user’s profile image in the User pane.
8.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
85
3. Setup the BioStar System
To capture face images with devices:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user’s name.
3.
Click the Face (Fusion) tab in the User pane.
4.
Select the enrollment device you will use for capturing face images from the dropdown list.
5.
In the 1st Face section, click Capture, and then have the user align his or her face with
the camera, as prompted by the device.
6.
If desired, click Use Profile Img to use the image assigned to the user’s profile instead
of capturing a new image.
7.
Repeat steps 5-7 in the 2nd Face and 3rd Face sections to capture additional face
images.
8.
Click Apply to save your changes.
3.6.4
Issue Access Cards
Suprema manufactures access control devices that support multiple types of access
cards, as listed below:

EM4100: BioStation, BioEntry Plus, and BioLite Net, BioStation 2, BioStation L2,
BioEntry W2

MIFARE® : BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, BioLite Net, BioStation 2, BioStation
L2, BioEntry W2

iCLASS® : BioEntry Plus, BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioEntry W2

FeliCa® : BioEntry Plus, BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2

HID prox: BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioStation 2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
86
3. Setup the BioStar System
EM4100 and HID cards require only a card ID to complete card registration, while MIFARE
and iCLASS cards support two operation modes: Card Serial Number (CSN) and Templateon-Card modes. FeliCa cards support only the CSN mode. When using the CSN mode, you
can read the serial number just as you would for an EM4100 or HID card. When using
Template-on-Card mode, you must record the user information, including fingerprint
templates, directly to the card.
Follow the procedures below to issue the appropriate type of card and then add it to the
user's account.
!
Note: Only one card can be issued and used for BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation L2
or BioEntry W2.
Attention: A card cannot be issued with a 2.x device connected as a slave device.
3.6.4.1
Issue EM4100 cards
To register a EM4100 card for a user:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user's name.
3.
In the User pane, click the Card tab.
4.
Select a “EM4100” from the Card Type drop-down list.
5.
Click Card Management. This will open the Card Management dialog box.
6.
Select a Device ID from the drop-down list.
7.
Enter a card ID (32 bits) and custom ID (8 bits) either manually or by reading
from the card (you can also click Use User ID to insert the user’s ID in these
fields):

To enter the data manually, type the card ID and custom ID in the
corresponding fields, click OK, and then skip to step 8.

To read the data from the card, click Read Card (the LED on the device
you selected will begin flashing) and then place the card on the device.
After the card has been read, click OK.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
87
3. Setup the BioStar System
8.
Click Apply to save the card to the user's account.
3.6.4.2
Issue HID proximity cards
To register a HID proximity card for a user:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user's name.
3.
In the User pane, click the Card tab.
4.
Select “HID Prox” from the Card Type drop-down list.
5.
Click Card Management. This will open the Card Management dialog box.
6.
Select a Device ID from the drop-down list.
7.
Enter a card ID and facility code (FC) either manually or by reading from the
card (you can also click Use User ID to insert the user’s ID in these fields):
To enter the data manually, type the ID and facility code in the

corresponding fields, click OK, and then skip to step 8.
To read the data from the card, click Read Card (the LED on the device

you selected will begin flashing) and then place the card on the device.
After the card has been read, click OK.
8.
Click Apply to save the card to the user's account.
3.6.4.3
Issue FeliCa cards
To register a FeliCa card for a user:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user's name.
3.
In the User pane, click the Card tab.
4.
Select “FeliCa” from the Card Type drop-down list.
5.
Click Card Management. This will open the Card Management dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
88
3. Setup the BioStar System
6.
Select a device or Smart Card Reader from the Device ID drop-down list.
7.
Enter a card ID and custom ID either manually or by reading from the card
(you can also click Use User ID to insert the user’s ID in these fields):
To enter the data manually, type the card ID and custom ID in the

corresponding fields, click OK, and then skip to step 8.
To read the data from the card, click Read Card (the LED on the device

you selected will begin flashing) and then place the card on the device.
After the card has been read, click OK.
8.
Click Apply to save the card to the user's account.
3.6.4.4
Issue MIFARE, DESFire or iCLASS CSN cards
MIFARE, DESFire and iCLASS CSN cards work much like EM4100 and HID cards, in
that they store an uneditable card serial number (CSN) for a user.
To register a card for a user:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user's name.
3.
In the User pane, click the Card tab.
4.
Select “Mifare CSN” or “iCLASS CSN” from the Card Type drop-down list.
5.
Click Card Management. This will open the Card Management dialog box.
6.
Select a Device ID or Smart Card Reader from the drop-down list.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
89
3. Setup the BioStar System
7.
Enter a card ID either manually or by reading from the card (you can also
click Use User ID to insert the user’s ID in these fields):
To enter the data manually, type the ID and facility code in the

corresponding fields, click OK, and then skip to step 8.
To read the data from the card, click Read Card (the LED on the device

you selected will begin flashing) and then place the card on the device.
After the card has been read, click OK.
8.
Click Apply to issue the card to the user's account.
3.6.4.5
Issue MIFARE, DESFire or iCLASS template cards
MIFARE, DESFire and iCLASS template cards allow you to store user information
and fingerprint templates directly on the card.
!
Attention: DESFire template cards can be issued with a 2.x device only.
To register a card for a user:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user's name.
3.
In the User pane, click the Card tab.
4.
Select “Mifare/DESFire Template” or “iCLASS Template” from the drop-down
list.
5.
Click Card Management. This will open the Card Management dialog box.
6.
Select a Device ID or USB MIFARE device (if connected) from the drop-down
list.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
90
3. Setup the BioStar System
7.
If desired, click Bypass Card to allow the user to bypass the fingerprint
authentication.
8.
Click Read Card. The LED on the device that you selected will begin flashing.
9.
Place the card on the device.
10. After the card is read, click OK.
11. Click Apply to issue the card to the user's account.
Note: iCLASS 2000, 2002 and 2004 cards are not supported as template cards.
3.6.4.6
Change the MIFARE, DESFire or iCLASS site key
Data encryption for MIFARE, DESFire and iCLASS cards is governed by a 48-bit
site key. Only those cards with appropriate site keys can be read by connected
devices. BioStar allows you to define up to two MIFARE, DESFire and iCLASS site
keys (primary and secondary), so that you can change the site key for existing
cards.
Note: This feature is only supported for template-on-cards. Also, please note that
site keys must be carefully guarded. If the site key is revealed, your security
system can be bypassed.
!
Attention: Use numbers for the site key.
Attention: DESFire site keys can be applied to only 2.x devices.
To change the site key:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Card > Mifare Card or DESFire Card or
iCLASS Card > Mifare Sitekey or DESFire Sitekey or iCLASS Sitekey . This will
open the Mifare Sitekey, DESFire Sitekey or iCLASS Sitekey dialog box.
2.
Enter a new primary key in the New Primary Key field.
3.
Enter the key again in the Retype Primary Key field.
4.
Click the Use option button to activate the secondary key function. This
allows cards with the old site key to be read and rewritten with the new key:
a. Enter the old site key in the New Secondary Key field.
b. Enter the old site key again in the Retype Secondary Key field.
5.
When you are finished editing the site key, click OK.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
91
3. Setup the BioStar System
Note: When all cards have been rewritten with the new site key, Suprema advises
disabling the secondary key function to prevent old cards from being used for
access.
3.6.4.7
Edit the MIFARE layout
BioStar allows you to customize the layout that is used to record user information
and fingerprint templates. This layout will be applied to all new MIFARE cards
issued with the devices you specify.
MIFARE 1K cards are organized into 16 sectors with 4 blocks of 16 bytes each.
MIFARE 4K cards are organized into 32 sectors with 4 blocks and 8 sectors with
16 blocks. The following constraints apply to the MIFARE layout:
The first sector (block 0 through block 3) is reserved and cannot be used for

other data.
The last block of each sector (blocks 3, 7, 11, and so on) is reserved for site

key information.
The card information sector (CIS) occupies three contiguous blocks and

should start at the first available block of a sector (blocks 4, 8, 12, and so
on).
There should be no overlap between each template’s data.

To edit the MIFARE layout:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Card > Mifare Card > Mifare Layout. This
will open the Mifare Layout dialog box.
2.
Use the drop-down lists and input fields to configure the following
parameters of the MIFARE layout:

CIS Index Block: Select the block index to use for header information (4,
8, 12, or 16).

Number of Templates: Select the number of templates to include in the
layout (0 to 4).

Template Size: Select the number of bytes to use in the template. The
default size is 334 bytes.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
92
3. Setup the BioStar System
Template 1-4 Start Block: Enter the starting block for each fingerprint

template.
3.
To use the custom layout, click Apply to Devices and select the appropriate
device numbers from the Device Tree dialog box.
4.
To save your changes, click Save.
Note: To reset any changes you have made, click Default. To exit the dialog box
without saving changes, click Close.
3.6.4.8
Edit the DESFire layout
BioStar allows you to customize the layout that is used to record user information
and fingerprint templates. This layout will be applied to all new DESFire cards
issued with the devices you specify.
!
Attention: DESFire site keys can be applied to only 2.x devices.
To edit the DESFire layout:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > DESFire Card > DESFire Layout. This will
open the DESFire Layout dialog box.
2.
Enter the following parameters of the DESFire layout:

App ID: Set the application ID. This plays a role of directory which
includes file ID.

File ID: Set the file ID.

Number of Templates: Select the number of templates to include in the
layout (default is 2).

Template Size: Select the number of bytes to use in the template. The
default size is 302 bytes.
3.
To use the custom layout, click Apply to Devices and select the appropriate
device numbers from the Device Tree dialog box.
4.
To save your changes, click Save.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
93
3. Setup the BioStar System
Note: To reset any changes you have made, click Default. To exit the dialog box
without saving changes, click Close.
3.6.4.9
Edit the iCLASS layout
BioStar allows you to customize the layout that is used to record user information
and fingerprint templates. This layout will be applied to all new iCLASS cards
issued with iCLASS devices.
BioEntry Plus iCLASS devices support 16k bit (2k Byte) and 32k bit (4k Byte)
iCLASS cards. The 16k bit (2k Byte) cards are available with either 2 or 16
application areas and are organized into 237 blocks of 8 bytes each. The 32k bit
(4k Byte) cards are available with either 2 or 16 application areas, plus an
additional 16k user configurable memory, and are organized into 8 pages with 26
blocks of 8 bytes each.
To edit the iCLASS layout:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > iCLASS Card > iCLASS Layout. This will
open the iCLASS Layout dialog box.
2.
Enter the following parameters of the iCLASS layout:

CIS Index Block: Select the block index to use for header information
(default value is 13).

Number of Templates: Select the number of templates to include in the
layout (default is 2).

Template Size: Select the number of bytes to use in the template. The
default size is 382 bytes.

Template 1-4 Start Block: Enter the starting block for each fingerprint
template (Template 1 default value is 19; Template 2 default value is 67).
3.
To use the custom layout, click Apply to Devices and select the appropriate
device numbers from the Device Tree dialog box.
4.
To save your changes, click Save.
Note: To reset any changes you have made, click Default. To exit the dialog box
without saving changes, click Close.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
94
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.6.4.10
Read card information from USB-based readers
You can specify options to read information from USB-based contactless readers
like a DE-620 by clicking Option > Card > USB Reader > Card ID Format.
Format: Set the type of pre-processing on the card ID data to Normal,

allowing the data to be processed in its original form. Wiegand type is not
supported.
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and

devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte (LSB).
Bit Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and

devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
3.6.5
Transfer User Data
BioStar allows you to automatically transfer user information to devices, by selecting the
“Auto” setting from the menu bar (Option > User > Transfer Mode > Auto). However, you can
also manually transfer data to devices. When doing so, you can either transfer selected
users to selected devices or synchronize all users at once. BioStar also allows you to
retrieve data from a device and transfer it to the BioStar server.
3.6.5.1
Transfer a user to a device
To transfer a single user or selected users to a device or devices:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Transfer Users to Device. This will open the Select a
Device dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
95
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.
Select a device or devices from the list on the left by clicking the checkboxes
next to device names.
4.
If desired, click the checkbox to overwrite users with different information.
5.
Click Transfer to Device to send the user information to the selected devices.
Note: You can also delete users from devices with this menu. This action cannot
be undone, so use this feature with caution. To delete users from a device, click a
user’s name and then click Delete Users.
When using Xpass or Xpass S2 devices as lift readers, transferring settings to the
device with the User menu will reset all of the settings and user data stored on the
device. To preserve the settings, use the Transfer to Device function in the Lift
menu instead.
3.6.5.2
Synchronize all users
To synchronize all user information between the BioStar server and connected
devices,
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Transfer Users to Device. This will open the Select a
Device dialog box (see section 3.6.5.1).
3.
Select a device or devices from the list on the left by clicking the checkboxes
next to device names.
4.
Click Synchronize All Users.
3.6.5.3
Retrieve user data from a device
To retrieve data from a device:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Manage Users in Device. This will open the Select
Target Device dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
96
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.
Click a device name in the list on the left to display user templates contained
in the device.
4.
Click a user in the Template Information list (new users will be highlighted in
yellow).
5.
Click Get From Device.
Note: You can also delete users from devices with this menu. This action cannot
be undone, so use this feature with caution. To delete users from a device, click a
user’s name and then click Delete (or click Delete All to delete all user records at
once).
In the template information, “Template Num” is the number of fingerprint
templates stored in the device and “Face Num” is the number of face templates
stored in the device.
!
!
Caution: If there are the same users on the BioStar database when you retrieve
user data from Xpass devices, the data will be overwritten without fingerprint
data because Xpass devices do not store fingerprint data.
Caution: Department information and PIN cannot be imported when importing
user information saved in BioStation 2, BioStation A2 or BioStation L2.
3.6.5.4
Merge user data imported from the device
This is to protect the existing data in the server, but import only changed or added
user data from the device. If you choose ‘Overwrite’, this will delete the entire user
data previously saved and replace with the user data imported from the device.
To protect important user data, the following 5 items will not be merged and saved
to the server DB.

Admin Level (Changed only if admin level is ‘Normal User’ in the server
database and ‘Admin User’ in the device.)

Authentication mode

Number of Authentication

Authentication time limit
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
97
3. Setup the BioStar System
Password

Merge and import user data
1.
Click Option > User > Manage Users in Device. Check the Merge option. (Default)
2.
In the shortcut pane, click User.
3.
In the task pane, click Manage Users in Device. This will open the Manage Users in
Device window.
4.
Click the device name in the device list on the left and display user information in the
device.
5.
With color information, compare user data between the device and server and select
users.
6.
Click Get from Device.
3.6.6
User Data Encryption
BioStar provides AES256 user data encryption. User data encryption helps protect valuable
private information against crimes such as identity theft upon any accidental or intentional
data breach.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
98
3. Setup the BioStar System
To encrypt user data:
1.
Click Option > User > Personal Information Encryption.
2.
In the Personal Information Encryption dialog box, click the check box beside Use
Personal Information Encryption – a pop-up window will appear.
3.
Read the message then click Yes to accept it.
4.
Click Change Encryption Key then enter the encryption key.
Note You can use Personal Information Encryption without encryption keys. Any
combination of letters, numbers and special characters up to 32 characters can be used as
the encryption key.
5.
3.7
Click Change to close the window then click Save to save changes.
Setup Timezones
In the BioStar system, timezones are used to schedule permissions and restrictions. You
can apply timezones to restrict the hours that a user is permitted to access a door by
combining doors and timezones in access groups (see section 3.8).
3.7.1
Create a Timezone
To create a timezone schedule:
1.
Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click New Timezone.
3.
Enter a name for the timezone.
4.
In the Timezone pane, create a weekly schedule by highlighting the effective hours for
each day. You can copy a schedule from one day to the next by clicking the arrow to
the right of the day.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
99
3. Setup the BioStar System
5.
If desired, you can add up to two holiday schedules to the timezone. To create holiday
schedules, see section 3.7.2.
6.
When you are finished creating the timezone, click Apply.
7.
Next, transfer the timezone data to devices:
8.
In the task pane, click Transfer to Device. This will open the Device Tree dialog box.
9.
Select a device or devices by clicking the checkboxes in the Device Tree dialog box.
10. Click OK.
You can now combine the timezone with door permissions to create an access group (see
section 3.8).
3.7.2
Create a Holiday Schedule
To create a holiday schedule:
1.
Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click New Holiday.
3.
Enter a name for the holiday.
4.
In the Holiday pane, set the date the holiday begins with the drop-down calendar.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
100
3. Setup the BioStar System
5.
If the holiday recurs every year, click the checkbox below the drop-down list.
6.
Set the duration of the holiday (in days).
7.
Click Add to add the holiday to the list.
8.
Click Apply.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
101
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.8
Setup Access Groups
Access groups allow you to define sets of access permissions that can include doors,
users, and timezones. Before adding an access group, you must setup doors (see section
3.3) and timezones (see section 3.7). After creating access groups, you must manually
transfer the data to affected devices (see section 3.8.4).
3.8.1
Add an Access Group
To add an access group:
1.
Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click New Access Group.
3.
Type a name for the new access group in the box that appears in the navigation pane
and press Enter.
4.
In the Access Control tab (in the Access Group pane), click Add. This will open the
Access Group dialog box.
5.
Select doors to add to the group by clicking the checkboxes next to door groups or
individual doors.
6.
Select a timezone to apply to the group from the drop-down list at the bottom of the
dialog box.
7.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary to add multiple sets of doors and timezones to the
access group.
8.
Click OK to add your selections to the group.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
102
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.8.2
Add Users to Access Groups
After adding access group, you must add users to the group. You can add users to access
groups from the User tab, as described below or by assigning access groups to a user from
the User pane, as described in 3.8.3. You can assign a user to a maximum of four access
groups.
To add users to access groups:
1.
Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2.
From the User tab (in the Access Group pane), click Add.
3.
In the Add New User dialog box, select users to add to the group by checking user
groups or individual users.
4.
Click OK.
If you have setup user groups, users will appear under their respective groups.
3.8.3
Assign Access Groups to Users
You can also define which access groups a user will belong to (up to four total) from the
User pane.
To assign an access group to a user:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user’s name.
3.
Click the Access Control tab in the User pane.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
103
3. Setup the BioStar System
4.
Click Add. This will open the User Access Group dialog box.
5.
Click the name of an access group from the list on the left and then click >.
6.
Repeat step 5 as needed to assign additional access groups.
7.
When you are finished assigning access groups, click OK.
3.8.4
Transfer Access Groups to Devices
To transfer access group data to devices:
1.
Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Transfer to Device. This will open the Device Tree dialog box.
3.
Select a device or devices by clicking the checkboxes in the Device Tree dialog box.
4.
Click OK.
3.8.5
Check for Access Rules by Device
You can check the access rules applied for devices by viewing access groups, timezone,
and holiday schedules by device. You can also maintain the idential configuration data
across the server and devices by either transferring or deleting the data that is inconsistent
between them.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
104
3. Setup the BioStar System
To check access groups configured in each device:
1.
Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Manage Access Group in Device. This will open the Device Tree
dialog box.
3.
Select a device in the Device tree pane.
4.
Select Access Group, Timezone, or Hoilday Schedule below the Device tree pane to
view how they are configured in each device. The configuration data to the
corresponding options will be displayed in the right pane. The data will be highlited in
the following colors depending on whether they are applied in the server, a device, or
both.

Yellow: Indicates that the configuration data in both the device and the server
are identical.

Red: Indicates that the configuration data in the device and the server are
different.
5.

Green: Indicates that the configuration data are applied to the device only.

Blue: Indicates that the configuration data are applied to the server only.
Optional: Select the data that you want to delete from the device and click Delete from
Device in the lower-right corner of the screen.
6.
Optional: Select the data that you want to transfer from the server to a device and
click Send to Device in the lower-right corner of the screen.
3.9
Setup Time and Attendance
BioStar’s time and attendance features allow you to define time categories, shifts, and
holiday rules. Refer to the procedures in this section as well as the steps in section 3.7.2 to
configure time and attendance options.
3.9.1
Add a Time Category
To add a time category:
1.
Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Add Time Category. This will open a Time Category pane similar
to the one below.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
105
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.
Enter a name and description for the time category.
4.
Add details for the time category:

Time Rate: Enter the rate at which time is calculated for this time category.

Rounding Unit(Min): Specify in minutes how to round a user’s work time (for
example, a entry of “5” will round a user’s work time to the nearest 5-minute
decrement).

5.
Display Color: Set how the time category will appear in the daily schedule.
Click Apply to save the time category.
3.9.2
Add a Daily Schedule
BioStar versions 1.35 and higher support a maximum of 256 daily schedules.
To add a daily schedule:
1.
Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Add Daily Schedule. This will open a Daily Schedule pane
similar to the one below.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
106
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.
Enter a name and description for the daily schedule.
4.
Set the start time for the daily schedule and, if desired, click the checkbox to the right
to let the BioStar to record workers’ first come-in and last go-out activities via the
BioStar system as their check-in and check-out activities for the day.
5.
Define the daily schedule by adding one or more time slots:
b. Specify the details for the time slot:
- Start time: Set the beginning time for the time slot. If the time slot begins in
the following calendar day, click the checkbox (“Next”) to the right.
-
End time: set the ending time for the time slot. If the time slot ends in the
following calendar day, click the checkbox (“Next”) to the right.
-
Time Category: Select one a time category from the drop-down list. See
section 3.9.1 to define the time categories that will appear in this list.
-
Minimum Duration: Set the minimum duration for the time slot (in minutes).
Workers must be checked in for at least the minimum duration, or the system
will record no time worked for the time slot.
-
Grace (Start): Activate and set a grace period for checking in late at the
beginning of the time slot (in minutes). Click the checkbox to enable the grace
period and then specify the length of the grace period in the corresponding
field. Workers who check in within the grace period will be considered to have
checked in right at the start of the time slot.
-
Grace (End): Activate and set a grace period for checking out early at the end
of the time slot (in minutes). Click the checkbox to enable the grace period and
then specify the length of the grace period in the corresponding field. Workers
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
107
3. Setup the BioStar System
who check out within the grace period will be considered to checked out right
at the end of the time slot.
-
Rounding (In): Specify in minutes how to round a user’s check-in time (for
example, a entry of “5” will round a user’s time to the nearest 5-minute
decrement).
-
Rounding (Out): Specify in minutes how to round a user’s check-out time (for
example, an entry of “5” will round a user’s time to the nearest 5-minute
decrement).
-
Auto Check IN: Enable or disable this feature to automatically check-in a user
who has failed to check-in for the time slot.
-
Auto Check OUT: Enable or disable this feature to automatically check-out a
user who has failed to check-out for the time slot.
-
Affect Result: Allow or disallow data from this time slot to be used to
determine overall time and attendance result per one daily schedule.
c. Click Add to add the time slot to the daily schedule.
6.
Click Apply to save the daily schedule.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
108
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.9.3
Add a Shift
To add a shift:
1.
Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Add Shift. This will open a Shift pane similar to the one below.
3.
Click one of the option buttons to set the shift as a part of a daily or weekly cycle. If
you select “weekly,” a calendar week will constitute a cycle. If you select “daily,” you
can specify any number of consecutive days (e.g., 5, 10, or 20 days) to constitute a
cycle.
Note: Daily cycle is available only with the Standard Edition of BioStar.
4.
Select start and end dates from the drop-down calendars.
5.
Activate days of the cycle by clicking the checkboxes on the left.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
109
3. Setup the BioStar System
6.
Click the ellipsis button (...) to select a daily schedule. This will open the T&A Tree
dialog box. See section 3.9.2 to define the daily schedules that will appear in this
dialog box.
7.
Select a daily schedule and click OK to apply the daily schedule to the shift.
8.
Repeat steps 5-7 as needed.
Note: You can copy a schedule from one day to the next by clicking the arrow to the right of
the day. In addition, you can add up to 1,024 daily schedules to the list.
9.
Click Apply to save the shift.
3.9.4
Assign Users to Shifts
Assign users to shifts to enable BioStar to record time and attendance data. You can
assign individual users to shifts via the User pane or assign multiple users to a shift via the
Time and Attendance pane.
To assign individual users to shifts via the User pane:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user name.
3.
In the User pane, click the T&A tab.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
110
3. Setup the BioStar System
4.
Click the option button next to Shift Management and then click Add at the bottom of
the User pane. This will open the T&A Tree dialog box.
5.
Select a shift and click OK.
6.
Click Apply to save the T&A settings for the user.
To assign multiple users to a shift via the Time and Attendance pane:
1.
Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a shift name.
3.
In the Shift pane, click the User tab and then click Add at the bottom of the pane. This
will open the Add New User dialog box.
4.
Select one or more users and click OK.
5.
Click Apply to save the T&A settings for the shift.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
111
3. Setup the BioStar System
To add a T& A rule by user:
1.
Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2.
Click Individual Shift in the task pane. This will open the Individual Shift dialog box.
3.
In the User tree pan, click the user that you want to add a T&A rule for.
4.
Among the Shift Management, Holiday Rules Management, and Leave Management,
select the appropriate option button to add a type of the schedule that you want to
add, and then click Add in the bottom of the screen.
5.
Specify the details of the schedule that you want to add, and then click OK.
6.
Optional: To override the existing shift schedules, select the Shift Override
Management option button, and then click Add in the bottom of the screen.
Note: This overriden schedules are only supported for Daily Report and Individual
Report when reports are created. Also, please note that they will be maintained when
you choose the ‘Rebuild’ option, and will not be deleted even if you choose the
‘Rebuild All’ option.
Overriden shift schedules: Preferential shift rules which are temporarily applied
7.
Specify the shift that you want to override and its period, and then click OK.
8.
In the bottom of the screen, click Apply to make changes.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
112
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.9.5 Choose a Device for T&A
Devices can be chosen for the T&A report. If Default is selected, all devices are used for
T&A report. But when T&A devices are selected, T&A report is created using event logs in
the selected devices. And if it is not included as a T&A device, T&A event keys applied to
the device will not be displayed from the T&A report.
Select and deselect with >, >> or <, <<, and check selected devices and unselected devices
through the panel. Manual Add can be made through direct device ID and name input when
a device is no longer able to be found from the server but used before.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
113
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.10 Setup Alarms
BioStar can provide multiple levels of alarm notification. The system can activate system
alarms by emitting sounds from devices and connected computers. The system can also
be configured to send email notifications to specified recipients. In addition, you can
configure the system to receive inputs from external devices (such as fire warning devices)
or send outputs to external devices (such as alarm sirens).
3.10.1 Configure Alarm Settings and Sounds
BioStar allows you to customize how the system responds to events. You can configure
alarm settings by creating customized priority levels and selecting the action to take when
an event occurs. You can also add your own alarm sounds to further customize the
system.
3.10.1.1
Customize alarm actions
To customize alarm actions:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Event > Alarm Setting. This will open the
Alarm Setting dialog box.
2.
Select a priority level from the drop-down list and click Add. This will open a
list of events.
3.
Select the events to include in the priority level and click OK.
4.
Select an action or actions by clicking the checkboxes on the right.

Program Sound: Choose a sound from the drop-down list and then
specify the duration (“play count”) of the sound in seconds. If you set the
Play Count to 0, the specified sound will play until someone with
administrative privileges manually stops the sound via the Realtime
Monitoring tab in the Monitoring pane. To add custom sounds to the list,
please see section 3.10.1.2.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
114
3. Setup the BioStar System

Send Email: Click the ellipsis button (…) to the right to select an email
recipient. To configure email notifications, please see section 3.10.2.

Acknowledge: Activate pop-up alerts on client PCs.

Color: Specify the color of text and background on any event raised by
priority in the Alert Window.
5.
Repeat steps 2-4 as desired to customize other priority levels.
6.
When you are finished, click Save.
3.10.1.2
Add custom alarm sounds
To add custom alarm sounds:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Event > Sound Setting. This will open the
Sound Setting dialog box.
2.
Click Add.
3.
Locate a waveform (.wav) file on your computer or network and click Open.
4.
If desired, click a sound and then click Play to hear the sound.
5.
When you are finished, click Save.
3.10.2 Configure email notifications
BioStar sends email notifications when an alarm event occurs (not available in the free
version). As explained in 3.10.1.1, you can customize which events will trigger an
automatic email alert. BioStar supports email notification through TLS or SSL secured mail
servers.
To configure an email notification:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Event > E-mail Setting. This will open the Email
Setting dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
115
3. Setup the BioStar System
2.
Type the email address, SMTP server, port number, SMTP ID, and SMTP password in
the Sender Info section, then choose one of the options(NO SECURITY, TLS or SSL) in
the Security Type drop-down list.
3.
Type the email address in the Recipient Info section.
4.
Click Add to add the configuration to the list.
5.
Repeat steps 2-4 as necessary to add other email configurations.
6.
When you are finished, click Save.
E-mail setting
Using Alarm setting, you can send an e-mail with user-customized format.
1.
Click Option > Event > Alarm Setting > Send Email > The “…” button, then the Admin &
Contents window will open.
2.
Click the “Setup” button and the “Email Setting” window will open.
3.
Fill in “Sender Info” and click the “Add” button.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
116
3. Setup the BioStar System
4.
Click the “Add” button.
5.
Click the “Contents” button and you can modify the e-mail contents settings.
6.
Email contents can be applied to each Priority by using >> button.
7.
Click “Add” to open “Email Format” window.
8.
Select among six items in Add Real Data section to be added to Message. These items
are allocated to the actual data at the designated location when email is sent out. For
example, ##DATE## is changed to the actual date and time of the event, and
##USER## is changed to the actual user name. Message items can be deleted
manually.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
117
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.10.3 Configure Settings for External Devices
When using external devices with BioStar, you must configure settings to determine what
actions will occur in response to input signals. For more information about configuring
devices and device settings, see sections 3.2 and 5.1.
3.10.3.1
Configure outputs to external devices
You may choose to have certain devices send signals to external devices, such as
alarm sirens, when selected events occur.
To configure outputs:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a device name.
3.
In the Device pane, click the Output tab.
4.
Click Add at the bottom of the pane. This will open the Output Setting dialog
box.
5.
Configure actions that will activate (send a signal to) a specified output relay:
a. In the Alarm On Event section, select an event from the first drop-down
list.
b. Select the device number or All Device from the second drop-down list.
c. Select a signal setting from the third drop-down list.
d. Enter a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or higher
priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For example, an
alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be canceled only by an
alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
e. Click Add.
6.
Configure actions that will turn off (stop sending a signal to) an activated
output relay:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
118
3. Setup the BioStar System
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
In the Alarm Off Event section, select an event from the first drop-down
list.
Select the device number or All Device from the second drop-down list.
Enter a priority for the event.
Click Add.
When you are finished, click Save.
3.10.3.2
Configure inputs from external devices
To integrate BioStar's door control with other alarm systems, such as fire warning
systems, you can specify the actions BioStar will take when receiving an input.
You can also configure inputs to work with manual door releases (exit buttons)
and other types of external devices.
To configure inputs:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a device name.
3.
In the Device pane, click the Input tab.
4.
Click Add at the bottom of the pane. This will open the Input Setting dialog
box.
5.
Select an input port from the second drop-down list.
6.
Select the normal position of the input switch (N/O-normally open or N/Cnormally closed).
7.
Select a Function to be triggered (Generic Input, Emergency Open, Release All
Alarm, Restart Device, Disable Device, LED Green Input, LED Red Input,
Buzzer Input, Access Granted Input, and Access Denied Input).
Note: With BioStar 1.8v, LED Green Input, LED Red Input, Buzzer Input, Access
Granted Input, and Access Denied Input were newly added. And these input
options are available only with BioStation (FW 1.93v), BioStation T2 (FW
1.3v), FaceStation (FW 1.3v), BioEntry Plus (FW 1.6v), BioEntry W (FW 1.2v),
BioLite Net (FW 1.4v), and Xpass (FW 1.3v).
8.
Select a function for the input (Not Use, Generic Input, Emergency Open,
Release All Alarms, Restart Device, or Disable Device).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
119
3. Setup the BioStar System
9.
Select a schedule for applying the function (Always, Disable, or custom
schedules).
10. Set the minimum duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must last to
trigger the specified action.
11. Click OK.
3.11 Setup Cameras
This section describes how to add IP cameras and network video recorder (NVR) servers to
the Biostar system. Once you have properly set up the IP cameras and NVR servers, you
can monitor areas in real time and view event logs with still images or recorded videos.
BioStar supports the following IP cameras and NVR servers:
Model Name
Internet Protocol (IP) Camera
Network Video Recorder (NVR)
Server
Developer
AXIS PTZ 215
AXIS
AXIS M3203-V
AXIS
SNP-3120VH
Samsung Techwin
AXIS Camera Station
AXIS
NET-I Ware
Samsung Techwin
3.11.1 Add an NVR Server
Network video recorder (NVR) servers store video streams transferred from all connected
cameras and allow you to view the videos when you check event logs.
To add an NVR server to the BioStar system:
1.
Click Camera in the shortcut pane.
2.
Click Setup Camera in the Task pane.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
120
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.
In the Task pane, click Add New Camera Server. This will open a Camera (Setup Mode)
pane similar to the one below.
4.
In the Basic Information section, enter a name, type, model, IP address, and port
number for the NVR server, and then enter the BioStar user name and password
required to access the NVR server.
5.
Click Detect to view cameras that are currently connected to the NVR server.
6.
Click Apply at the bottom right of the Camera (Setup Mode) pane. This will add the
detected cameras under the NVR server in the navigation pane, as illustrated below.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
121
3. Setup the BioStar System
7.
In the navigation pane, click a camera name. This will open the Camera (Setup Mode)
pane.
8.
Click Add at the bottom right of the Device List to open the Device Tree dialog box.
9.
Click a checkbox next to a device name, and then click OK.
10. Click Apply at the bottom right to apply the changes to the BioStar system.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
122
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.11.2 Add an IP Camera
BioStar allows you to add an IP camera, assoicate it with an access control device, and
specify the events that will trigger the IP camera to send captured still images to the
BioStar system.
To add an IP camera to the BioStar system:
1.
Click Camera in the shortcut pane.
2.
Click Setup Camera in the Task pane (if desired).
3.
In the Task pane, click Add New Camera. This will open a Camera (Setup Mode) pane
similar to the one below.
4.
In the Basic Information section, enter a name, type, model, IP address, and port
number for the IP camera and enter a user name and password for the BioStar to
acess the IP camera.
5.
In the Details tab, click Add at the bottom right of the Device List section to open the
Device Tree dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
123
3. Setup the BioStar System
6.
Select a device to associate the IP camera with and click OK.
7.
Click Add at the bottom right of the Event List section and select an event that will
trigger the IP camera to send a captured still image to the BioStar system.
8.
Click Apply at the bottom right to apply the changes to the BioStar system.
3.11.3 Configure an IP Camera
BioStar can control the movement of pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras. When you use an IP
camera that supports the PTZ feature, you can aim it at a spot you want to surveil.
To control the movement of a PTZ camera:
1.
Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2.
Click a PTZ camera in the navigation pane.
3.
In the Camera (Setup Mode) pane, click the Setup tab.
4.
Use the controls in the Pan & Tilt and the Zoom sections to aim the PTZ camera at the
desired spot.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
124
04
Manage the BioStar
System
Once you have properly set up the BioStar system, management is fairly simple. BioStar allows you
to monitor events in real-time and view event logs by date, control parts of the system remotely,
manage users, and upgrade device firmware directly from the BioStar interface. In addition, you can
activate fingerprint encryption, if necessary, to provide an additional level of security and privacy.
4.1
Monitor Events in Real Time
The BioStar system records events from all connected devices. To monitor events in real
time, please click Monitoring in the shortcut pane, then click the Realtime Monitoring tab.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
125
4. Manage the BioStar System

This tab shows all events that have occurred since you last logged into the system.
The tab shows the current monitoring status (Monitoring Started or Monitoring
Paused) and includes buttons for starting (play) or stopping (pause) real-time
monitoring. The sound bar icon on the right shows whether an alarm sound is
currently playing (green bars) or not (grey bars). To stop an alarm sound, click the
sound bars icon.

BioStar displays the following camera icons at the front of the event logs:
Icon
Description
The event log includes a still image. Click the event log to view the
image.
The event log includes a video. Double-click the event log to view the
video.
When both camera icons are displayed, single-click the icon to view the still image and
double-click the icon to view the recorded video. When you double-click the video icon, a
video playback window will appear that is similar to the one below.
Coupled with the face detection features of X-Station, BioStation T2, FaceStation, or
BioStation A2, administrators can verify users’ identity by clicking Show Image (to view the
user’s stored face image) and Auto Image Reflect (to view the most recent face image
captured by the local device). Clicking Show Image also opens a window at the bottom
where the user image will be displayed. Click Real Size to view the full-sized (640 x 480)
stored image, instead of a thumbnail version and click Show Popup to open the image in a
new window that can be repositioned on the screen.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
126
4. Manage the BioStar System
To see a users’ photos upon successful authentication events, click Option > Event >
Profile Image Setting in the menu bar, select event types, and then click the checkbox next
to Show Image Profile. The user’s image will appear on the realtime monitoring tab when
he or she successfully completes one of the authentication events specified in the Profile
Image Setting dialog box.
As of BioStar V1.3, administrators can monitor users’ locations and authentication status
via a Roll Call (muster) feature. This feature allows administrators to determine whether
users are present, missing, or have gained entry to areas for which they are not authorized.
4.1.1
Monitor Muster Zones in Real Time
BioStar allows you to monitor and track employees during an emergency and determine
whether or not all employees have reported to the muster area.
To monitor and track employees:
1.
Click Monitoring in the shortcut pane.
2.
Click a muster zone in the Monitoring pane.
3.
In the Task pane, click Roll Call. This will open the Roll Call dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
127
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.
Click View Report to open the Roll Call Report.
To save the report data as a comma delimited file, click Save as CSV. To print the report,
click the printer icon. To export the report, click the export icon.
4.1.2
Monitor Areas with Cameras in Real Time
BioStar allows you to monitor specified areas with the connected camera in real time.
To monitor specified areas in real time:
4.2
1.
Click Camera in the shortcut pane.
2.
Click Monitor Camera in the Task pane (if desired).
3.
Click a camera in the navigation pane.
View Event Logs
BioStar allows you to view event logs for users, doors, and zones. You can access predefined logs from the Event tabs in user, door, and zone panes or view access logs from the
Administrator menu. You can also use the Log List tab in the Monitoring pane to specify
log parameters.
BioStar automatically collects log information from connected devices as long as the
server is running. However, if you have devices that are not connected to the BioStar server,
you must manually upload logs before viewing them.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
128
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.2.1
Upload Logs to BioStar
For devices that are not connected to the BioStar server, you must manually upload logs
before viewing them.
To upload logs to BioStar:
1.
Click Monitoring in the shortcut pane.
2.
Click the Log List tab in the Monitoring pane.
3.
In the Task pane, click Upload Log. This will open the Upload Log dialog box.
4.
Select an upload option by clicking the corresponding box:
a. Upload Logs: Use this option to upload logs for a specific time period. Specify the
period with the drop-down calendars.
b. Upload All Logs: Use this option to upload all logs.
c. Get Recent Logs: Use this option to upload logs written since the previous upload.
d. Device Type: Specify a device type that you wan to upload log data from, either a
reader or USB.
5.
Select the devices from which to upload logs by clicking the checkboxes next to the
device numbers.
6.
Click OK. BioStar will download log records from the selected devices and display the
activities in the log list.
Note: Log upload is only supported for X-Station, BioStation T2, and FaceStation.
4.2.2
View Logs in User, Door, and Zone Panes
To view pre-defined logs:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
129
4. Manage the BioStar System
1.
Click User or Doors in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, click a user, door, or zone name.
3.
In the User, Doors, or Zone panes, click the Event tab.
4.
Set an event period (beginning and ending dates) with the drop-down calendars.
5.
Click Get Log. This will generate a list of the relevant events for the period you
specified.
4.2.3
View Logs from the Monitoring Pane
To specify log filters or view logs for groups of users, doors, or zones:
1.
Click Monitoring in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the Monitoring pane, click the Log List tab.
3.
Set an event period (beginning and ending dates) with the drop-down calendars.
4.
Set the parameters to generate a log:

To show events by alarm priority, click the Event checkbox and select an event
priority from the drop-down list. To add a new alarm priority, click the ellipsis
button (...) to open the Alarm Priority dialog box.

To show events by user, click the User checkbox and then click the ellipsis button
(…) to select a user or users from the User Tree or Department Tree dialog box.
You can select all users by selecting the top level of the user tree.

To show events for a particular device, click the Device ID checkbox and then
click the ellipsis button (...) to select a device from the Device Tree dialog box. To
show only network events for a device, you can also click the Only Network
History checkbox.

To show all events, leave all the checkboxes unchecked.

To show the user’s image at the bottom of the tab, click Show Image. For more
information about viewing user images, see section 4.1.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
130
4. Manage the BioStar System
5.
Click Get Log to display the events.
4.2.4
View Access Logs
From the Administrator menu, you can view histories of system access and record
modification by type of user.
To view access logs:
1.
From the menu bar, click Administrator > Access Log. This will open the Access Log
dialog box.
2.
Click a option button to select either administrators or users.
3.
Set an event period (beginning and ending dates) with the drop-down calendars.
4.
Select a type of access or modification event with the Access drop-down list.
5.
If desired, specify a particular admin or user by clicking the checkbox next to the
Admin ID, Admin IP, or User ID fields, and then entering the appropriate identification.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
131
4. Manage the BioStar System
6.
Click Get Log. This will generate a list of the relevant events for the period you
specified.
4.3
Monitor Door Events via a Visual Map
BioStar allows you to conveniently manage doors on a visual representation of your actual
floor plan. On the Visual Map, you can customize your floor plan, add doors, and monitor
door status and activity (for example, whether the door is open or closed, authentication
events, and door alarms). If you have more than one floor plan, you can create additional
Visual Maps for each floor. The Visual Map feature is available only in the Standard Edition.
4.3.1
Create a Visual Map
In the setup mode, you can add the floor plan of your building and place doors.
To add the floor plan and place doors on the plan:
1.
In the shortcut pane, click Visual Map.
2.
In the task pane, click Setup Mode. “Monitor Mode” will appear in the title bar of the
Visual Map window.
3.
In the task pane, click Add Visual Map. This will open a new Visual Map window on
the right.
4.
In the Visual Map window, type a name for the new Visual Map.
5.
At the bottom of the Visual Map window, click Set Background to add a floor plan. The
BioStar supports images larger than resolution 730x470 in jpg, bmp, gif, or png format
only.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
132
4. Manage the BioStar System
6.
Choose an image and click Open.
7.
Click Add Door to add doors. This will open a window with a list of doors.
8.
From the door list, click the checkboxes next to doors to add and click Apply. Door
icons will appear on the floor plan.
9.
Click and drag the door icon to the desired location on the floor plan. You can
individually relocate a door icon or name by double-clicking the door icon or name.
10. To remove a door from the floor plan, click the door and then click Remove Door.
11. Repeat steps 7-10 as necessary to add additional doors.
12. When you are finished adding doors, click Apply.
Note: To remove all doors from the plan and start over, click Reset.
4.3.2
Monitor Doors on a Visual Map
In the monitor mode, you can view the status and activities for each door on the visually
enhanced map.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
133
4. Manage the BioStar System
To monitor doors:
1.
In the task pane, click Monitor Visual Map. “Monitor Mode” will appear in the title bar
of the Visual Map window.
2.
Monitor door status and activities on the visual map, as represented by the following
icons. Door activities, such as successful authentication or alarms will appear on the
door icons:
Icon
Activity
Door is closed / Door alarm is clear
Door is open
Successful authentication while door is closed
Successful authentication while door is open
Failed authentication while door is closed
Failed authentication while door is open
Held or forced open door / Held or forced open door
alarm
Note: Door icons will change only when door sensors have been assigned in the door
settigns and detect the door status. In other words, door icons change only when the door
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
134
4. Manage the BioStar System
actually opens or closes and not when you click Open Door or Close door. For more
information about door settings, see section 5.2.1.
3.
To open or close a door, click a door and then click Open Door or Close Door. To
change settings for a door, click a door and then click Setup Door.
4.
The current relay status can be checked through Visual Map in Monitoring.
5.
Show Event Tooltip for Selected Door option is added to indicate the details of the
current door status.
6.
Event or door name font size can be enlarged or reduced by selecting font size in
Setup Visual Map and Monitor Visual.
4.4
Control Doors, Alarms, and Devices Remotely
BioStar allows administrators or operators to control doors, alarms, and devices remotely.
You can open or close doors via a computer connected to the BioStar system. You can also
release (cancel) alarms remotely and lock or unlock devices.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
135
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.4.1
Open or Close Doors
In some situations, an administrator or operator may need to open or close a door
remotely.
To open or close doors:
1.
Click Monitoring in the shortcut pane.
2.
The Door/Zone Monitoring tab lists door names and their statuses. To change the
status (open or closed) of a door, click the door name and then click either Open Door
or Close Door.
You can also open and close doors while monitoring a Visual Map. For more information,
see section 4.3.2.
4.4.2
Release Alarms
When an event triggers an alarm, administrators or operators can release the alarm
remotely.
To release alarms:
1.
Click Monitoring in the shortcut pane.
2.
The Door/Zone Monitoring tab lists doors names and alarm events. To release
(cancel) an alarm, click the door name and then click Release Alarm.
4.4.3
Lock or Unlock Devices
BioStar allows you to lock and unlock devices to prevent unauthorized access when
BioStar is not running. This action blocks communication from devices. You can either lock
devices manually from the BioStar interface or automatically when you exit the BioStar
software. All connected devices can be simultaneously locked or unlocked, but you cannot
lock or unlock devices that are connected directly to the BioStar server.
4.4.3.1
Lock or unlock connected devices
To lock all connected devices, from the menu bar, click Option > Device > Lock All
Devices.
To unlock all connected devices:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Device > Unlock All Devices.
2.
If necessary, enter a password in the Enter Locking Password dialog box and
click OK (if you have not created a locking password, simply click OK). See
section 4.4.3.2 to create a locking password.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
136
4. Manage the BioStar System
!
Attention: 2.x devices (BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2) do
not support this function.
4.4.3.2
Set automatic device locking
To set automatic device locking:
!
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Device > Automatic Locking. This will open
the Auto Locking dialog box.
2.
Click the first checkbox to lock all devices when exiting BioStar.
3.
If desired, click the second checkbox to change the lock password:
a. Enter the old password
b. Enter the new password
c. Retype the new password to confirm.
Attention: 2.x devices (BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2) do
not support this function.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
137
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.4.3.3
Reset a device lock
If you have forgotten the locking password for a device, Suprema’s technical
support team can send you an unlock code.
To request the code:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Device > Automatic Locking. This will open
the Auto Locking dialog box.
2.
Click the Initialize Password checkbox to activate the buttons at the bottom
of the screen.
3.
Click Get Challenge Code. This will open the Get Challenge Code dialog box.
4.
Select the appropriate device from the drop-down list and click Get.
5.
Click Save as File to save the challenge code to your computer.
6.
Email the challenge code to Suprema ([email protected]).
Suprema’s technical support personnel will return an unlocking code to you
via email.
7.
When you receive the code from Suprema, open the Auto Locking dialog box
and activate the buttons (see steps 1-2).
8.
Click Unlock Device and Password to Default. This will open the Write
Challenge Code dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
138
4. Manage the BioStar System
9.
Click Open Code File and locate the file sent to you by Suprema.
When you have opened the file, click Write. This will unlock the device and reset
the locking password to the default (no password).
!
4.5
Attention: 2.x devices (BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2) do
not support this function.
Manage Users
With the BioStar system, you can delete users, transfer users to other departments, and
customize user information fields. You can also export or import user data for creating
custom reports, batch editing, or other needs.
4.5.1
Delete Users
If the occasion arises, you can easily remove users from the BioStar system.
To delete a user:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
Right-click a user's name.
3.
Click Delete User.
4.
Click OK to confirm the deletion.
4.5.1.1
Delete an individual user via command cards
After issuing command cards, you can delete an individual user directly from a
BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, or Xpass or Xpass S2 device. For more information
about issuing command cards, please see section 3.2.6.1 and 3.2.8.1.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
139
4. Manage the BioStar System
To delete users directly from a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device via command
cards:
1.
Place a delete card (command card) on a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device.
2.
If authorization is required, an administrator must scan his or her fingerprints
to continue.
3.
Place the user's access card on the device and then have the user place his
or her finger on the scanner (as prompted by the device).
To delete users directly from an Xpass or Xpass S2 device via command cards:
1.
Place a delete card (command card) on an Xpass or Xpass S2 device.
2.
If authorization is required, an administrator must place his or her access
card on the device to continue.
3.
Place the user's access card on the device.
4.
Place the delete card on the device again to confirm the action.
4.5.1.2
Delete all users via command cards
After issuing command cards, you can delete all users directly from a BioEntry
Plus, BioEntry W, or Xpass or Xpass S2 device. For more information about issuing
command cards, see section 3.2.6.1 and 3.2.8.1.
To delete all users directly from a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device via
command cards:
1.
Place a delete all card (command card) on a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W
device.
2.
If authorization is required, an administrator must scan his or her fingerprints
to continue.
3.
Place the delete all card on the device again to confirm the action.
To delete all users directly from an Xpass or Xpass S2 device via command cards:
1.
Place a delete all card (command card) on an Xpass or Xpass S2 device.
2.
If authorization is required, an administrator must place his or her access
card on the device to continue.
3.
Place the delete all card on the device again to confirm the action.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
140
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.5.2
Transfer Users to Other Departments
BioStar makes moving users to other departments very simple. Before transferring a user,
you must create a department.
To create a department:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the navigation pane, right-click User that is top level of department.
3.
Click Add Department.
4.
Enter a name for the department.
To transfer users to a department, simply click and drag a user name onto a department
name.
Note: Up to four department levels can be created.
4.5.3
Customize User Information Fields
BioStar allows you to customize user information fields. This can be useful for altering the
default information fields or for creating new fields.
4.5.3.1
Add new information fields
To add new information fields:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > User > Custom Field Setting. This will open
the Custom Fields Management dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
141
4. Manage the BioStar System
2.
Select an order number from the first drop-down list (choose a number that
is not already in use).
3.
Select a field type from the second drop-down list. To restrict the field to
numerical values, click the Only Digit checkbox.
4.
Enter item data (for example, items to appear in a combo box) and a name
for the item.
5.
Click Add.
6.
Repeat steps 2-5 as desired to create additional information fields.
7.
When you are finished, click Save.
4.5.3.2
Modify existing information fields
To modify existing information fields:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > User > Custom Field Setting. This will open
the Custom Fields Management dialog box (see section 4.5.3.1).
2.
Click the item you want to modify in the list at the bottom. The data will
appear in the fields at the top of the screen.
Note: Items 1-4 are required fields and cannot be modified or deleted.
4.5.4
3.
Modify the data as desired.
4.
Click Modify.
5.
Repeat steps 2-4 as desired to modify additional information fields.
6.
When you are finished, click Save.
Export User Data
Exported user data is formatted as a comma-delimited file (CSV), which can be edited with
a text editor or Microsoft Excel.
To export user data:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Export User. This will open the Exporting dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
142
4. Manage the BioStar System
3.
Select types of user data to export by clicking items in the list on the left and then
clicking >.
4.
Optional: Click Show Column Name below the selected filed list to include a field’s
column name with its data in an exported file.
5.
After selecting all the types of user data to export, click Next.
6.
Type a path and filename for the user data or click Browse to select a location to save
the file.
7.
Click Next.
8.
Click Export to begin exporting the user data.
9.
When the export is complete, click Finish.
4.5.5
Import User Data
User data in comma-delimited format (CSV) can be imported to BioStar.
To import user data:
1.
Click User in the shortcut pane.
2.
In the task pane, click Import User. This will open the Importing dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
143
4. Manage the BioStar System
3.
Type a path and filename where the user data is located or click Browse to select a
file.
4.
Click Next. The raw data types will be displayed and the User list field will default to
“Not Use. Click here to change.”
5.
Click the cell to the right of a data sample. This will open the Setup Field dialog box,
which allows you to map the raw data to a user information field in BioStar.
6.
Map the data to a field by selecting a field label from the drop-down list and then click
OK.
Note: Up to four department levels can be displayed in BioStar. In the CSV file, include
department levels in the same cell, separated by slashes (for example, “Department
1/Department 2/Department 3”), and then map the cell to the “Department” field in BioStar.
7.
Repeat steps 5-6 as necessary to map additional data.
8.
Click “Next” after matching data value and filed name correctly.
If the CSV column type exported from BioStar has not been changed, you can drop 57 steps by the auto select button which enables to connect the column and field
automatically.
9.
Click Import.
10. If you map data to fields in an existing user account, you will prompted to confirm that
you wish to overwrite the existing data. Click Yes or Yes to All to confirm or click No or
No to All to deny.
11. Click Finish.
4.6
Manage Time and Attendance
BioStar allows you to monitor the time and attendance status of users and generate
reports of T&A events, which you can edit or export as needed.
4.6.1
Monitor T&A Status via the IO Board
The IO Board displays time and attendance events only for entrance and exit events
performed via the T&A function keys of access control devices. This feature is available
only in the Standard Edition of BioStar.
You can use the board to verify recent T&A activities or to quickly determine which users
are checked in or out. Users can use the board to view their own T&A activities.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
144
4. Manage the BioStar System
To monitor the time and attendance status of users:
1.
Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2.
From the task pane, click IO Board. This will open the IO Board dialog box.
3.
Click User, a user name, or a department name in the pane on the left. This will display
the corresponding T&A status in the pane on the right.
4.
To close the dialog box, click Close.
4.6.2
Generate T&A Reports
You can generate T&A reports to view various time and attendance events for users. You
can also modify and print time and attendance data for other uses, such as calculating
payrolls.
To generate a T&A report:
1.
Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
145
4. Manage the BioStar System
2.
In the task pane, click Report. This will open the T&A Report dialog box.
3.
Click a option button to select a report type:

Daily Report: A report of all activities for the specified date range sorted by date.

Individual Report: A report of activities for the specified date range sorted by user
ID.

Result Report: A report of activities that you specify via the drop-down list.

Edit History: A report of edited entries.

Daily Summary: A summary of activities for the specified date range sorted by
date.

Individual Summary: A summary of activities for the specified date range sorted
by user ID.
Note: In case a simple hh: mm format is desired in your Daily Report and Individual
Report rather than the original hh: mm(person) or hh: mm(day) style, click Option > TA
> Format then click Display person/day.
4.
Specify the detail options in the Option area.

Display Person/Day: Determine whether ‘Person/Day’ appears with data in the
report.

Time Format(1.0h): Display times in decimal dotted notation, for example, ‘1 Hr 7
Mins’ is expressed in ‘1.11’.

In/Out Report: Display the times (up to the first 10 in and out times) when people
are authenticated to enter and exit an office or a building.

Paper Size: Select A4 or Letter size paper.
5.
Select a date range by clicking the drop-down calendars.
6.
Click View Report to retrieve and display the results.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
146
4. Manage the BioStar System
Note: Click Upload Log to retrieve data from all networked devices. Click Update Report to
refresh the report with any data you have modified (see section 4.5.3).
You can sort report data by clicking any column header (the sort will toggle between
ascending and descending orders). You can also rearrange the columns by dragging and
dropping column headers in a new location. Furthermore, you can add or remove columns
by using the menu that appears when you right-click on any column header:
To add a column to the report:
1.
Right-click on any column header.
2.
Click Column and select a column to add to the report.
To remove a column from the report:
1.
Right-click on the column you want to remove.
2.
Click Remove column.
To display overtime hours in the report:
1.
Click Option > T&A > Overtime Rule Setting. This will open the Overtime Rule Setting
dialog box.
2.
Select a period unit which regular work hours are based on, and enter the amount of
regular work corresponding to the period. The work hours that have exceeded the
regular time would be considered overtime work and reported.
3.
Click OK.
Note: To successfully display overtime hours in a report, you should set the start day
of the periold to Sunday of the week that you want to check for.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
147
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.6.3
Modify T&A Reports
Time and attendance data can be modified for time reporting or payroll purposes. After
generating a T&A report, you can locate cells that you want to modify and then click the cell
and enter a new value or select an option from the drop-down list. This will save the
modification to the report, but it will not overwrite the original data collected from access
control devices. If you want to reproduce the report with the original data, click the
checkbox next to “Rebuild” and then click Update Report.
To perform detailed modifications on report data:
1.
Generate a T&A report as described in 4.5.2.
2.
Right-click a cell and click Detailed editing. This will open the Edit Data dialog box.
3.
To edit an event, change the following event properties as necessary and then click
Edit Event. To add an event, change the following event properties as necessary and
then click Add Event. To delete the event, click Delete Event.
4.

Date: Select whether the event occurred on this day or the next day.

Event: Select the type of event.

Time: Set the time of the event.

Device: Set the device where the event occurred.
When you are finished modifying the event data, click the “X” in the top right corner to
close the dialog box.
5.
In the T&A Report window, ensure that the “Rebuild” checkbox is NOT checked.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
148
4. Manage the BioStar System
6.
Click Update Report. The report will show the changes you have made. The changes
you have made via the detailed editing will not be restored to the original data even if
you click the check box next to “Rebuild” and click Update Report. If you want to
reproduce the report with the original data, click the checkboxes next to “Rebuild” and
“Rebuild All” and then click Update Report.
Note: You can sort report data by clicking any column header (the sort will toggle between
ascending and descending orders). You can also rearrange the columns by dragging and
dropping column headers in a new location.
4.6.4
Print or Export T&A Report Data
To print or export T&A report data:
1.
Generate a T&A report as described in 4.5.2 and make any necessary modifications as
described in 4.5.3.
2.
Click View Report. This will open a preview window similar to the one below.
3.
To print the report, click the print icon on the toolbar.
4.
To export report data, click the export icon on the toolbar and then select an export
format and a destination. You can export data in the following formats:

Adobe Acrobat (PDF)

Crystal Report (RPT)

HTML 3.2 or 4.0

Microsoft Excel 97-2000 or Microsoft Excel 97-2000–data only (XLS)

Microsoft Word or Microsoft Word–editable (RTF)

Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)

Record Style–Columns with spaces (REC)

Report Definition (TXT)
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
149
4. Manage the BioStar System

Rich Text Format (RTF)

Comma Separated Values (CSV)

Tab Separated Text (TTX)

Text (TXT)

XML
Note: You can refresh the report data by clicking the refresh icon on the toolbar. You can
also search for text in the report by clicking the search (binoculars) icon on the toolbar.
4.7
Manage Devices
You can easily remove devices, if necessary, and upgrade the device firmware directly from
the BioStar interface. When removing devices, first ensure that any new data that may have
been added at the terminal has been transferred to the BioStar server.
4.7.1
Remove Devices
If you need to remove a device from the BioStar system, click Device in the shortcut pane,
then right-click the device name and click Remove Device.
4.7.2
Upgrade Device Firmware
On occasion, it is necessary to upgrade your devices to the latest firmware version.
To upgrade device firmware:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Device > Firmware Upgrade. This will open the
Firmware Upgrade dialog box.
2.
Click the option button next to the type of device you want to upgrade.
3.
Click Select Device and select a device or devices from the Device Tree dialog box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
150
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.
Click OK to close the Device Tree dialog box.
5.
Click Select Firmware.
6.
Locate the firmware file on your computer or network and click Open.
7.
Click Upgrade.
8.
When the firmware upgrade is complete, wait for the device to restart, and then click
Close.
4.7.3
Downgrade Device Firmware
Devices may not work properly if downgraded or reverted back to an older version of
firmware. Suprema does not recommend a downgrade. If your devices require a
downgrade, please contact Suprema Technical Support (Email:
[email protected]), your Suprema distributor, or a local Suprema dealer.
4.8
Activate Fingerprint Encryption
By default, additional fingerprint encryption is turned off. In most cases, activating this
encryption is unnecessary. However, you may choose to turn on the encryption to provide
extra security or privacy. Keep in mind that activating fingerprint encryption requires
management of encryption keys and should be performed only by advanced users.
Activating fingerprint encryption will render all previously saved templates unusable. As a
result, it is best to activate the encryption prior to registering users.
To activate fingerprint encryption:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Fingerprint. This will open the Fingerprint dialog
box.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
151
4. Manage the BioStar System
2.
Click the checkbox under “Security Option” to activate the fingerprint template
encryption.
3.
Click Yes to acknowledge the warning statement.
4.
If desired, you may also change the encryption key:
a. Click Encryption Key. This will open the Change Encryption Key dialog box.
b. Enter a new encryption key in the first field.
c. Confirm the key by entering it in the second field.
d. Click Change.
5.
Click Save. The option you have chosen will appear on the Fingerprint tab in the
Device pane.
4.9
Change the Fingerprint Template
BioStar offers three types of fingerprint templates: ISO 19794-2, ANSI378, or Suprema’s
proprietary format. Suprema’s format is active by default. Changing fingerprint template
options will render all previously saved templates unusable. As a result, it is best to choose
a template option prior to registering users.
!
Attention: The user’s fingerprint format change and encryption should be set before the
user's fingerprint is registered. If the fingerprint format changes and encryption is
carried out after the fingerprint is registered, it should be carried out after all user
settings screens are closed. In addition, if it is changed while the user settings screens are
being selected, use BioStar Client after restarting it.
To change the fingerprint template option:
1.
From the menu bar, click Option > Fingerprint. This will open the Fingerprint dialog
box.
2.
Click the checkbox under “Use ISO Format Template” to select the ISO format or “Use
ANSI378 Format Template” to select the ANSI format.
3.
Click Yes to acknowledge the warning statement.
4.
Click Save.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
152
5. Customize Settings
05
Customize Settings
This section describes the settings available in the BioStar software. BioStar provides precise control
and customization of the access control system via settings for device functions, door and zone
behaviors, and user accounts.
5.1
Customize Device Settings
While most device settings are similar for BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, BioLite Net,
Xpass, Xpass S2 and X-Station devices, the devices provide slightly different capabilities.
BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation L2 and BioEntry W2 support BioStar 2 by default
and setting may be different from BioStar 2. The sections that follow describe the settings
for each device separately. To access the tabs described below, click Device in the shortcut
pane, then click a device name.
5.1.1
Customize Settings for BioStation Devices
The sections that follow describe the settings available for BioStation devices. Customize
the way BioStation devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
153
5. Customize Settings
5.1.1.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for BioStation devices.


BioStation Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
1: 1 Operation Mode: the drop-down lists in this area allow you to control the
authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can choose a normal
authentication mode for working hours and a more strict authentication
mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You can specify authentication
modes either by device or by user (see section 5.4.1). Unless a particular
mode is specified for a user, the device authentication mode will apply.
–
ID/Card + Fingerprint: Set the device to require ID or card plus
fingerprint authorization (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
–
ID/Card + Password: Set the device to require ID or card plus
password authorization (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
–
ID/Card + Fingerprint/Password: Set the device to require ID or card
plus fingerprint or password authorization (Always, Disable, or
custom schedule).
–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
Disable, or custom schedule).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
154
5. Customize Settings
–



ID/Card + Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require ID or card
plus fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, Disable, or
custom schedule).
Mifare (available only on BioStation Mifare devices)
–
Not Use Mifare: Check this box to disable MIFARE card authorization.
–
Use Template on Card: Check this box to use the template on the
MIFARE card for authorization.
–
View Mifare Layout: Click this button to view the MIFARE layout used
by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, please see section 3.6.4.7.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID data
(Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data will be
processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices will
interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
–
Bit Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
Other Options
–
1: N Schedule: Set a schedule for using fingerprint only
authentication (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
–
1: N Operation Mode: Set a method for activating the fingerprint
sensor (Auto, Ok/Function Key, or None).
–
Private Auth: Set the device to allow a private authorization method
(Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of the user
will be determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting, which is
located on the Details tab. If disabled, the authentication mode will be
determined by operation mode settings of the device.
–
Double Mode: Set the device to require authentication of two users’
access cards or fingerprints (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
The timeout for presenting the second authentication is 15 seconds.
–
Fast ID Matching: Set the device to allow quicker authentication, by
requiring users to input only the first two digits of the user ID and
scan a single fingerprint (Enable or Disable). This option attempts
authentication for a smaller subset of users (only those with the
same first two digits in their user IDs) to increase matching speed.
Note: This option does not support server matching (see 5.1.1.2). When
using function keys for T&A events (see 5.1.1.8), only keys F1-F4 are
supported (BioStation V1.7 and higher).
–
Interphone: Set the device to act as an interphone to allow
communication between people on either side of the door (Not Use or
Use).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
155
5. Customize Settings
In Double mode, setting option which includes an admin user is supported.
In Double mode, door relay will not open unless an admin user
authenticates within 15 seconds after a normal user authenticates. If this
option is not activated, the door relay will open when other two users,
regardless of whether being a normal user or an admin user.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioStation 1.93,
BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation 1.3,
BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2, BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
-
Use Wiegand Card Bypass: By Wiegand setting in BioStar, this feature exports
CSN regardless of whether the authentication is successful or not. This is
designed to be used as a dummy reader that doesn’t have a door control
feature. When a card data input is made, the device sends out the data
through Wiegand without going through a matching process.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioStation 1.93,
BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation 1.3,
BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2, BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
–
5.1.1.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization settings for
BioStation devices.

Fingerprint
–
Security Level: Set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
–
Image Quality: Set the strictness of the quality check for fingerprint
scans (Weak, Normal, or Strict). If a fingerprint image is below the
specified quality level, it will be rejected.
–
Sensitivity: Set the sensitivity of the fingerprint scanner (0 [Min] to 7
[Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in more easily captured
fingerprint scans, but also increases the sensitivity to external noise.
–
1: N Delay: Set the delay between scans when identifying fingerprints
(0 sec to 10 sec). This delay prevents the scanner from processing
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
156
5. Customize Settings
the same fingerprint more than once if a user has not yet removed his
or her finger from the scanner.

–
1: N Fast Mode: Set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
–
View Image: Set to show or hide fingerprint images on the BioStation
display (Yes or No).
–
Scan Timeout: Set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
–
Matching Timeout: Set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match (0 [Infinite] to 10
sec).
–
Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform fingerprint or card ID
matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this mode
is enabled, the devices will send the fingerprint template or card ID to
the server to verify a match. This mode is useful when you have more
users than can be downloaded to a device or user information cannot
be distributed due to security concerns.
–
Check Fake Finger: Set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
Check Duplicate FP: Set the device to determine whether or not a scanned
fingerprint has been previously enrolled. If the device determines that a
fingerprint has been previously enrolled, the enrollment process will fail.
5.1.1.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
BioStation devices.

TCP/IP Setting
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
157
5. Customize Settings



–
LAN Type: Select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Disable, Ethernet, or Wireless LAN).
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
–
WLAN: Select a preset WLAN configuration from the drop-down list.
This option is active only when WLAN is selected as the TCP/IP
setting.
–
Change Setting: Click to specify settings for a wireless local area
network (WLAN). This option is active only when WLAN is selected as
the TCP/IP setting. For more information about configuring settings
for a WLAN, please see section 3.2.4.
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
–
Max Conn.: Specify the maximum number of connections to allow.
Server
–
Use: Click this option button to enable the server mode.
–
Not Use: Click this option button to disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Server Port: Specify the port used to connect to the server.
–
SSL: Displays the status of SSL for the server connection.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’
time with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server
every one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when
the device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
RS485
–
Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
Slave, or PC Connection). For more information about RS485 modes,
see sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
–
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
RS232: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS232 (9600 to
115200).

USB Setting: Click the option buttons to enable or disable the USB port on
the BioStation device.
5.1.1.4
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings and
default access groups for a BioStation device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
158
5. Customize Settings


Entrance Limit Setting
–
Timed APB (min): Set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
–
Option 1-4: Click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
–
Max Number of Entrance: Set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied to new
users who have not been assigned to another access group.
5.1.1.5
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioStation device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings.
To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog
box. For more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.

Device: Select the BioStation (or Secure I/O) device for which you will add or
modify settings.

Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure I/O
devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2, Input 3.

Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the input
switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
159
5. Customize Settings
Function: Select an action to associate with the input:

–

–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Generic Input: The input port will be monitored for a triggering action
(For the events specified with “Detect Input 0-3” in the Output Setting
dialog box, please see section 5.1.1.6).
–
Emergency Open: Open doors controlled by this device. The normal
door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open until an
operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must enter
the master password for a BioStation device or provide
authentication locally for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device.
With BioStar 1.8v, LED Green Input, LED Red Input, Buzzer Input, Access
Granted Input, and Access Denied Input were newly added. And these input
options are available only with BioStation (FW 1.93v), BioStation T2 (FW
1.3v), FaceStation (FW 1.3v), BioEntry Plus (FW 1.6v), BioEntry W (FW 1.2v),
BioLite Net (FW 1.4v), and Xpass (FW 1.3v).
Schedule: Set the schedule during which the inputs will be monitored
(Always, Disable, or custom schedule).

Duration (ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must last to
trigger the specified action.
5.1.1.6
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a BioStation device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete output
settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Output
Setting dialog box. For more information about configuring output settings, please
see section 3.10.3.1.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
160
5. Customize Settings

Device Type: Select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: Select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these settings
are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.

Alarm On Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.

–
Event: Select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success, Auth
Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance
Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Close,
Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
–
Priority: set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or
2.
Alarm Off Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
–
Event: Select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
161
5. Customize Settings
example, a priority 2 “alarm on” event (activate) can be overridden
only by an “alarm off” (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.1.7
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers and
prevent them from being authenticated with the device.

Current Count: The total number of user IDs and access cards that have
been registered.

Reserved: The remaining number of user IDs and access cards that can be
registered.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
162
5. Customize Settings
5.1.1.8
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the BioStation display and event
sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must click Apply at the
bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.

Display/Sound
–
Language: Set the language to use on the display (Korean, English, or
Custom).
–
Sub Info: Set the info to display at the bottom of the BioStation
display (Time, or None).
–
Menu Timeout: Set the length of time before the display will return to
the idle screen (Infinite, 10 sec, 20 sec, or 30 sec).
–
Private Msg: Enable or disable the option to show a private message
on the BioStation display (Disable or Enable). You can add a private
message from the Event tab in the User pane: click Modify Private
Information, set options for display count and display duration, enter
text in the Private Message field, and then click Save.
–
Resource: Set the language resource file to use for the BioStar
interface (No Change, English, Korean, or Custom). To use a language
resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom and then
click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file.
–
Background: Set the type of background for the BioStation display
(Logo, Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP,
and PNG) cannot exceed 320x240 pixels each. Only one image at a
time can be used as a logo or notice, while up to 16 images can be
displayed (at a set interval) in a slide show.
–
Notice: Click this button to create a notice that will be shown on the
BioStation display. After creating a notice, you can click Apply to
apply the notice to the current device or Apply to Others to apply the
notice to additional devices.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
163
5. Customize Settings

–
Volume: Set the volume of the BioStation device (10% to 100%).
–
Msg Timeout: Set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed.
Background Image: Click this checkbox to upload new background images.
Click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a new image file.

Sound: Click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds. Click
an event from the list and then click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a
new sound file.
5.1.1.9
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a BioStation
device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you must click Apply at
the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.


T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode:
–
Not Use: Disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
–
Manual: Users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
–
Manual Fix: When a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in that
mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
–
Auto change: The device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
–
Event Fix: The device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key: Specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event types
associated with them:
–
Function Key: Select a function key from the drop-down list to assign
a T&A event (F1-F4, 1-9, CALL, 0, or ESC). If you are using the Event
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
164
5. Customize Settings
Fix mode, you can click the checkbox to the right to designate a fixed
event.
–
Event Caption: Enter a caption for the event.
–
Auto Mode Schedule: When using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the dropdown list. For more information on creating a timezone, please see
section 3.7.1.
–
Event Type: Set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use, Check
In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check in/out
events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the formal check
in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or the first check–
in and the last check–out events on that day. When you choose
Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as normal checkin/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled, users who
activate the appropriate keys will be regarded as arriving or leaving
on time at work even though they actually arrive late or leave early. If
you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being on time on
T&A reports but their work time will be calculated correctly based on
their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out, you can enable the
“Add work time after this event” option. If this option is enabled, users
activating the appropriate key will be considered working for the
remainder of the time slot even if they leave the office early.
5.1.1.10
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a BioStation
device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. For
more information on configuring the Wiegand format, see section 3.2.16.

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat connected RF
devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical function of
previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will allow RF card
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
165
5. Customize Settings
readers to operate independently, which allows them to be associated
with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their own device IDs.


5.1.2
Wiegand Input: Assign the Wiegand input:
–
Disabled: The input will not be used.
–
Wiegand [Card]: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as a
card ID.
–
Wiegand [User]: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as a
user ID.
Wiegand Output: Assign the Wiegand output:
–
Disabled: The output will not be used.
–
Wiegand [Card]: Inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in the ID
field of the Wiegand string.
–
Wiegand [User]: Inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in the ID
field of the Wiegand string.
Customize Settings for BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W
Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for BioEntry Plus and BioEntry W
devices. Customize the way BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W devices function by changing
these settings to suit your particular environment and operational needs.
5.1.2.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W devices.

BioEntry Plus Time/BioEntry W Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
– Time: Manually set the device time.
In Double mode, setting option which includes an admin user is supported. In
Double mode, door relay will not open unless an admin user authenticates
within 15 seconds after a normal user authenticates. If this option is not
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
166
5. Customize Settings
activated, the door relay will open when other two users, regardless of
whether being a normal user or an admin user.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioStation 1.93,
BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation 1.3, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2, BioLite
Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
-

Use Wiegand Card Bypass: This feature makes the device to send out Card
CSN according to Wiegand setting of BioStar without having to conduct a
matching. This is designed to be used as a dummy reader in a connection with
a third party access control unit through Wiegand. When a card data input is
made, the device sends out the data through Wiegand without going through a
matching process.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioStation 1.93,
BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation 1.3, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2,
BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.)
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
Operation Mode: For each of the following options, click the corresponding
checkbox to enable Double Verification Mode, which requires verification
of two users’ credentials to gain entry to a door.

–
All: Set the device to allow all types of authorization (Always, Disable,
or custom schedule).
–
Card + Fingerprint: Set the device to require card plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
–
Only Fingerprint: Set the device to require only fingerprint
authorization (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
–
Only CARD: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
Disable, or custom schedule).
–
Private Auth: Set the device to allow a private authorization method
(Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of the user
will be determined by a user’s authorization setting (Private Auth
Mode), which is located on the Details tab in the User pane. If
disabled, the authentication mode will be determined by the
operation mode settings of the device.
–
Double Verification Mode: Set the device to require verification from
two users during a selected schedule (Always, Disable, or custom
schedule).
Mifare/iCLASS (available on select models)
–
Bio Entry Plus Mifare devices:
–
Not Use Card: Check this box to disable MIFARE card authorization.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
167
5. Customize Settings


–
Card Reading Mode: Set the type of card authorization mode (Mifare
Template or Mifare CSN only)
–
View Mifare Layout: Click this button to configure the MIFARE layout
used by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, please see section 3.6.4.7.
Bio Entry Plus iCLASS devices:
–
Not Use Card: Check this box to disable iCLASS or FeliCa card
authorization.
–
Card Reading Mode: Set the type of card authorization mode (iCLASS
Template, iCLASS CSN only, or FeliCa CSN only).
–
View Card Layout: Click this button to configure the iCLASS layout
used by the device. For more information about configuring iCLASS
layouts, please see section 3.6.4.7.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID data
(Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data will be
processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices will
interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
–
Bit Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
168
5. Customize Settings
5.1.2.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization settings for
BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W devices.

Fingerprint
–
Security Level: Set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
–
Scan Timeout: Set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
–
Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform fingerprint or card ID
matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this mode
is enabled, the devices will send the fingerprint template or card ID to
the server to verify a match. This mode is useful when you have more
users than can be downloaded to a device or user information cannot
be distributed due to security concerns.
–
1: N Fast Mode: Set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
–
Matching Timeout: Set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match (0 [Infinite] to 10
sec).
–
Check Fake Finger: Set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
5.1.2.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for BioEntry
Plus or BioEntry W devices.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
169
5. Customize Settings



TCP/IP
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
Server
–
Use: Click this option button to use specific server settings.
–
Not Use: Click this option button to disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’
time with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server
every one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when
the device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
Support 100 Base-T: This option allows you to enable or disable a fast
Ethernet connection for the device. When enabled, the device will detect
the Ethernet network and automatically establish the best connection. If
you do not enable this option, the device will attempt to establish a
10Base-T Ethernet connection.


–
Use: Click this option button to enable the 100base-T connection for
the device.
–
Not Use: Click this option button to disable the 100base-T
connection for the device.
RS485
–
Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
Slave, or PC Connection).
–
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
Support MTU Size setting
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
170
5. Customize Settings
– Devices affiliated with Black Fin support MTU Size setting. The supported
packet size is between 1078 and 1514, and the default is 1514.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioEntry Plus 1.6,
BioEntry W 1.2, BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
5.1.2.4
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings and
default access groups, and T&A mode settings for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W
device.


Entrance Limit Setting
–
Timed APB (min): Set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
–
Option 1-4: Click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
–
Max Number of Entrance: Set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Access Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied
to new users who have not been assigned to another access group.

Automatic T&A Mode Change
–
T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode for the device (Disable,
Fixed In, Fixed Out, and Auto).
–
Fixed Entrance: When the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify when
to allow entrance events by selecting a timezone (Always, Disable, or
custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a timezone, please see section 3.7.1.
–
Fixed Exit Time: When the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify when
to allow exit events by selecting a timezone (Always, Disable, or
custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a timezone, please see section 3.7.1.
–
In Event Caption: Set a caption for check-in.
–
Out Event Caption: Set a caption for check-out.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
171
5. Customize Settings
5.1.2.5
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry
W device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete
input settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input
Setting dialog box. For more information about configuring input settings, see
section 3.10.3.2.

Device: Select the BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W (or Secure I/O) device for
which you will add or modify settings.

Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure I/O
devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2, Input 3.

Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the input
switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).

Function: Select an action to associate with the input:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Generic Input: The input port will be monitored for a triggering action
(events specified with “Detect Input 1-3” in the Output setting dialog
box —see section 5.1.2.6).
–
Emergency Open: Open doors controlled by this device. The normal
door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open until an
operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must enter
the master password for a BioStation device or provide
authentication locally for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device.
– With BioStar 1.8v, LED Green Input, LED Red Input, Buzzer Input, Access
Granted Input, and Access Denied Input were newly added. And these
input options are available only with BioStation (FW 1.93v), BioStation T2
(FW 1.3v), FaceStation (FW 1.3v), BioEntry Plus (FW 1.6v), BioEntry W (FW
1.2v), BioLite Net (FW 1.4v), and Xpass (FW 1.3v).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
172
5. Customize Settings

Schedule: Set the schedule for the input actions (Always, Disable, or custom
schedule).

Duration (ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must last to
trigger the specified action.
5.1.2.6
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a BioEntry Plus or
BioEntry W device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete output settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the
Output Setting dialog box. For more information about configuring output
settings, see section 3.10.3.1.

Device Type: Select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: Select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these settings
are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.

Alarm On Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
–
Event: Select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success, Auth
Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance
Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Close,
Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
173
5. Customize Settings
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or
2.

Alarm Off Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
–
Event: Select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on event (activate) can be overridden only by an
alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.2.7
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers and
prevent them from being authenticated with the device.

Current Count: The total number of user IDs and access cards that have
been registered.

Reserved: The remaining number of user IDs and access cards that can be
registered.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
174
5. Customize Settings
5.1.2.8
Command Card tab
The Command Card tab allows you to issue command cards. For more
information about command cards, see section 3.2.6.1.

Card ID: Enter the card ID or click Read Card and place a command card on
the reader to automatically populate the fields.

Command Type: Select a type of command card to issue (Enroll Card, Delete
Card, or Delete All Card).
5.1.2.9
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the LED and buzzer behaviors by
event. To save changes to these settings, you must click Update in the
corresponding section for each event.

Event: Specify the affected event by selecting it from the drop-down list.

LED: Set the LED behavior for a specified event.
–
Count: Enter a number of LED cycles for the specified event. Enter “0”
to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the LED.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
175
5. Customize Settings
–

Colors: Specify up to three display colors from the drop-down list.
The LED will cycle through these colors in order, from top to bottom.
Next to each color, enter the duration (in milliseconds) that the LED
should display the selected color and the duration (in milliseconds)
that the LED should remain off before advancing to the next color in
the cycle.
Buzzer: Set the buzzer behavior for a specified event.
–
Count: Enter a number of buzzer cycles for the specified event. Enter
“0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the buzzer.
–
Volume: Set up to three tone volumes from the drop-down list (Low,
Middle, or High). The buzzer will cycle through these volumes in
order, from top to bottom. Next to each volume, enter the duration (in
milliseconds) that the buzzer should maintain the selected volume
and the duration (in milliseconds) that the buzzer should remain off
before advancing to the next volume in the cycle.
–
Fade Out: Set the tone volume to fade out before advancing to the
next volume in the cycle by clicking this checkbox.
5.1.2.10
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a BioEntry Plus
or BioEntry W device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration
wizard. To activate the Wiegand feature for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device,
click the checkbox at the top right of the tab. For more information on configuring
the Wiegand format, see section 3.2.16.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
176
5. Customize Settings

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat connected RF
devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical function of
previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will allow RF card
readers to operate independently, which allows them to be associated
with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their own device IDs.


5.1.3
Wiegand Input: Assign the Wiegand input:
–
Disabled: The input will not be used.
–
Wiegand [Card]: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as a
card ID.
–
Wiegand [User]: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as a
user ID.
Wiegand Output: Assign the Wiegand output:
–
Disabled: The output will not be used.
–
Wiegand [Card]: Inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in the ID
field of the Wiegand string.
–
Wiegand [User]: Inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in the ID
field of the Wiegand string.
Customize Settings for BioLite Net Devices
The sections that follow describe the settings available for BioLite Net devices. Customize
the way BioLite Net devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.1.3.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for BioLite Net devices.

BioLiteNet Time
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
177
5. Customize Settings


–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
Sensor Mode
–
Always On: Set the device sensor to be always available on standby
(Always or Disable).
–
ID Entered: Set the device sensor to be available on standby only
after a valid ID is entered (Always or Disable).
–
OK Pressed: Set the device sensor to be available on standby only
after the OK key is pressed (Always or Disable).
Operation Mode: For each of the following options, click the corresponding
checkbox to enable Double Verification Mode, which requires verification
of two users’ credentials to gain entry to a door.


–
Fingerprint Only: Set the device to require fingerprint only
authorization (Always, Disable, or Custom Schedule).
–
Password Only: Set the device to require password only authorization
(Always, Disable, or Custom Schedule).
–
Fingerprint/Password: Set the device to require fingerprint or
password authorization (Always, Disable, or Custom Schedule).
–
Fingerprint+Password: Set the device to require fingerprint plus
password authorization (Always, Disable, or Custom Schedule).
–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
Disable, or Custom Schedule).
–
Private Auth: Set the device to allow a private authorization method
(Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of the user
will be determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting, which is
located on the Details tab. If disabled, the authentication mode will be
determined by operation mode settings of the device.
Mifare
–
Not Use Mifare: Check this box to disable MIFARE card authorization.
–
Use Template on Card: Check this box to use the template on the
MIFARE card for authorization.
–
View Mifare Layout: Click this button to configure the MIFARE layout
used by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, please see section 3.6.4.7.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID data
(Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data will be
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
178
5. Customize Settings
processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices will
interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
–
Bit Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
–
In Double mode, setting option which includes an admin user is
supported. In Double mode, door relay will not open unless an admin
user authenticates within 15 seconds after a normal user
authenticates. If this option is not activated, the door relay will open
when other two users, regardless of whether being a normal user or
an admin user.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioStation 1.93,
BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation 1.3, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2, BioLite
Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
– Use Wiegand Card Bypass: This feature makes the device to send out Card
CSN according to Wiegand setting of BioStar without having to conduct a
matching. This is designed to be used as a dummy reader in a connection
with a third party access control unit through Wiegand. When a card data
input is made, the device sends out the data through Wiegand without
going through a matching process.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioStation 1.93,
BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation 1.3, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2,
BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
5.1.3.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization settings for
BioLite Net devices.

Fingerprint
–
Security Level: Set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
179
5. Customize Settings
–
Scan Timeout: Set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
–
Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform fingerprint or card ID
matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this mode
is enabled, the devices will send the fingerprint template or card ID to
the server to verify a match. This mode is useful when you have more
users than can be downloaded to a device or user information cannot
be distributed due to security concerns.
–
1: N Fast Mode: Set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
–
Matching Timeout: Set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match (0 [Infinite] to 10
sec).
–
Check Fake Finger: Set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
180
5. Customize Settings
5.1.3.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for BioLite
Net devices.

Support MTU Size setting
– Devices affiliated with Black Fin support MTU Size setting. The supported
packet size is between 1078 and 1514, and the default is 1514.
(This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry
W 1.2, BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.)



TCP/IP
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
Server
–
Use: Click this option button to use specific server settings.
–
Not Use: Click this option button to disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’ time
with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server every
one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when the
device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
Support 100 Base-T: This option allows you to enable or disable a fast
Ethernet connection for the device. When enabled, the device will detect
the Ethernet network and automatically establish the best connection. If
you do not enable this option, the device will attempt to establish a
10Base-T Ethernet connection.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
181
5. Customize Settings

–
Use: Click this option button to enable the 100base-T connection for
the device.
–
Not Use: Click this option button to disable the 100base-T
connection for the device.
RS485
–
Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
Slave, or PC Connection).
–
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.3.4
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings and
default access groups for a BioLite Net device.


Entrance Limit Setting
–
Timed APB (min): Set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
–
Option 1-4: Click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
–
Max Number of Entrance: Set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Access Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied
to new users who have not been assigned to another access group.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
182
5. Customize Settings
5.1.3.5
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioLite Net device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings.
To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog
box. For more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.

Device: Select the BioLite Net (or Secure I/O) device for which you will add
or modify settings.

Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure I/O
devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2, Input 3.

Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the input
switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).

Function: Select an action to associate with the input:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Generic Input: The input port will be monitored for a triggering action
(For the events specified with “Detect Input 1-3” in the Output setting
dialog box, please see section 5.1.3.6).
–
Emergency Open: Open doors controlled by this device. The normal
door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open until an
operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must enter
the master password for a BioStation device or provide
authentication locally for a BioLite Net device.
With BioStar 1.8v, LED Green Input, LED Red Input, Buzzer Input,
Access Granted Input, and Access Denied Input were newly added.
And these input options are available only with BioStation (FW 1.93v),
BioStation T2 (FW 1.3v), FaceStation (FW 1.3v), BioEntry Plus (FW
1.6v), BioEntry W (FW 1.2v), BioLite Net (FW 1.4v), and Xpass (FW
1.3v).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
183
5. Customize Settings

Schedule: Set the schedule for the input actions (Always, Disable, or custom
schedule).

Duration (ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must last to
trigger the specified action.
5.1.3.6
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a BioLite Net device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete output
settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Output
Setting dialog box. For more information about configuring output settings, see
section 3.10.3.1.

Device Type: Select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: Select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these settings
are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.

Alarm On Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
–
Event: Select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success, Auth
Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance
Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Close,
Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
184
5. Customize Settings
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or
2.

Alarm Off Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
–
Event: Select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on event (activate) can be overridden only by an
alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.3.7
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers and
prevent them from being authenticated with the device.

Current Count: The total number of user IDs and access cards that have
been registered.

Reserved : The remaining number of user IDs and access cards that can be
registered.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
185
5. Customize Settings
5.1.3.8
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize LED and buzzer behaviors by
event. To save changes to these settings, you must click Update in the
corresponding section for each event. You can also customize the language used
on the device display.

Event: Specify the affected event by selecting it from the drop-down list.

LED: Set the LED behavior for a specified event.


–
Count: Enter a number of LED cycles for the specified event. Enter “0”
to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the LED.
–
Colors: Specify up to three display colors from the drop-down list.
The LED will cycle through these colors in order, from top to bottom.
Next to each color, enter the duration (in milliseconds) that the LED
should display the selected color and the duration (in milliseconds)
that the LED should remain off before advancing to the next color in
the cycle.
Buzzer: Set the buzzer behavior for a specified event.
–
Count: Enter a number of buzzer cycles for the specified event. Enter
“0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the buzzer.
–
Volume: Set up to three tone volumes from the drop-down list (Low,
Middle, or High). The buzzer will cycle through these volumes in
order, from top to bottom. Next to each volume, enter the duration (in
milliseconds) that the buzzer should maintain the selected volume
and the duration (in milliseconds) that the buzzer should remain off
before advancing to the next volume in the cycle.
–
Fade Out: Set the tone volume to fade out before advancing to the
next volume in the cycle by clicking this checkbox.
Language: Set the language to use on the display (Korean, English, or
Custom).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
186
5. Customize Settings

Resource File: Set the language resource file to use for the BioStar interface
by clicking the ellipsis (…) button and locating the resource file.
5.1.3.9
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a BioLite Net
device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you must click Apply at
the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.


T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode:
–
Not Use: Disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
–
Manual: Users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
–
Manual Fix: When a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in that
mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
–
Auto change: The device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
–
Event Fix: The device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key: Specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event types
associated with them:
–
Function Key: Select a function key from the drop-down list to assign
a T&A event (*1-*15). If you are using the Event Fix mode, you can
click the checkbox to the right to designate a fixed event.
–
Event Caption: Enter a caption for the event.
–
Auto Mode Schedule: When using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the dropdown list. For more information on creating a timezone, please see
section 3.7.1.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
187
5. Customize Settings
–
5.1.3.10
Event Type: Set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use, Check
In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check in/out
events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the formal check
in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or the first check–
in and the last check–out events on that day. When you choose
Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as normal checkin/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled, users using the
appropriate keys will be regarded arriving or leaving on time at work
even though they actually come late or leave early. If you enable the
“Only Result” option, they appear being on time on T&A reports but
their work time will be calculated correctly based on their actual
check in/out time. If you choose Out, you can enable the “Add work
time after this event” option. If this option is enabled, users using the
appropriate key will be considered working for the remainder of the
time slot even though they leave the office early.
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a BioLite Net
device. Unlike BioStation devices, only one Wiegand format can be configured at a
time (either input only or output only). You can click Change Format to launch the
Wiegand Configuration wizard. To activate the Wiegand feature for a BioLite Net
device, you can select the checkbox at the top right of the tab. For more
information on configuring the Wiegand format, pleaes see section 3.2.16.

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will process ID data from
networked devices and RF card readers in the same way (this is the typical
function of previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will allow RF
card readers to operate independently, which allows them to be
associated with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their own
device IDs.

Wiegand Input: Assign the Wiegand input:
–
Disabled: The input will not be used.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
188
5. Customize Settings

5.1.4
–
Wiegand [Card]: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as a
card ID.
–
Wiegand [User]: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as a
user ID.
Wiegand Output: Assign the Wiegand output:
–
Disabled: The output will not be used.
–
Wiegand [Card]: Inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in the ID
field of the Wiegand string.
–
Wiegand [User]: Inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in the ID
field of the Wiegand string.
Customize Settings for Xpass Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for Xpass devices. Customize the way
Xpass devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular environment and
operational needs.
5.1.4.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for Xpass devices.


Xpass Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
Operation Mode: For each of the following options, click the corresponding
checkbox to enable Double Verification Mode, which requires verification
of two users’ credentials to gain entry to a door.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
189
5. Customize Settings


–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
Disable, or custom schedule).
–
Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform card ID matching at
the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this mode is enabled,
the device will send card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode
is useful when you have more users than can be downloaded to a
device or user information cannot be distributed due to security
concerns.
Mifare
–
Not Use Mifare: Check this box to disable MIFARE card authorization.
–
Use Data Card: Check this box to use the user data on the MIFARE
card for authorization. The user data card does not provide
fingerprint templates.
–
View Mifare Layout: Click this button to view the MIFARE layout used
by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, please see section 3.6.4.7.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID data
(Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data will be
processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices will
interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
–
Bit Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
– In Double mode, setting option which includes an administrator is supported.
In Double mode, door relay will not open unless an administrator
authenticates within 15 seconds after a user authenticates. If this option
is not activated, the door relay will open when other two users, regardless
of whether being a user or an administrator, authenticate within 15 seconds.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioStation 1.93,
BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation 1.3, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2, BioLite
Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
– Use Wiegand Card Bypass: This feature makes the device to send out Card
CSN according to Wiegand setting of BioStar without having to conduct a
matching. This is designed to be used as a dummy reader in a connection
with a third party access control unit through Wiegand. When a card data
input is made, the device sends out the data through Wiegand without
going through a matching process.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioStation 1.93,
BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation 1.3, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2,
BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
190
5. Customize Settings
5.1.4.2
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for Xpass
devices.


TCP/IP
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
Support MTU Size setting
– Devices affiliated with Black Fin support MTU Size setting. The supported
packet size is between 1078 and 1514, and the default is 1514.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioEntry Plus 1.6,
BioEntry W 1.2, BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.


Server
–
Use: Click this option button to use specific server settings.
–
Not Use: Click this option button to disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’
time with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server
every one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when
the device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
Support 100 Base-T: This option allows you to enable or disable a fast
Ethernet connection for the device. When enabled, the device will detect
the Ethernet network and automatically establish the best connection. If
you do not enable this option, the device will attempt to establish a
10Base-T Ethernet connection.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
191
5. Customize Settings

–
Use: Click this option button to enable the 100base-T connection for
the device.
–
Not Use: Click this option button to disable the 100base-T
connection for the device.
RS485
–
Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
Slave, or PC Connection).
–
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.4.3
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings, default
access groups, and T&A mode settings for Xpass devices.


Entrance Limit Setting
–
Timed APB (min): Set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
–
Option 1-4: Click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
–
Max Number of Entrance: Set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Access Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied
to new users who have not been assigned to another access group.

Automatic T&A Mode Change
–
T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode for the device (Disable,
Fixed In, Fixed Out, and Auto).
–
Fixed Entrance: When the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify when
to allow entrance events by selecting a timezone (Always, Disable, or
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
192
5. Customize Settings
custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a timezone, please see section 3.7.1.
–
Fixed Exit Time: When the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify when
to allow exit events by selecting a timezone (Always, Disable, or
custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a timezone, please see section 3.7.1.
–
In Event Caption: Set a caption for check-in.
–
Out Event Caption: Set a caption for check-out.
5.1.4.4
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for an Xpass device. Buttons
at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings. To add
or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog box. For
more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.

Device: Select the Xpass (or Secure I/O) device for which you will add or
modify settings.

Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure I/O
devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2, Input 3.

Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the input
switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).

Function: Select an action to associate with the input:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Generic Input: The input port will be monitored for a triggering action
(For the events specified with “Detect Input 1-3” in the Output setting
dialog box, please see section 5.1.4.5).
–
Emergency Open: Open doors controlled by this device. The normal
door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open until an
operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must enter
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
193
5. Customize Settings
the master password for a BioStation device or provide
authentication locally for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device.
– With BioStar 1.8v, LED Green Input, LED Red Input, Buzzer Input, Access
Granted Input, and Access Denied Input were newly added. And these
input options are available only with BioStation (FW 1.93v), BioStation T2
(FW 1.3v), FaceStation (FW 1.3v), BioEntry Plus (FW 1.6v), BioEntry W (FW
1.2v), BioLite Net (FW 1.4v), and Xpass (FW 1.3v).

Schedule: Set the schedule for the input actions (Always, Disable, or custom
schedule).

Duration (ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must last to
trigger the specified action.
5.1.4.5
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for an Xpass device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete output
settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Output
Setting dialog box. For more information about configuring output settings, see
section 3.10.3.1.

Device Type: Select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these settings
are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.

Alarm On Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
–
Event: Select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success, Auth
Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
194
5. Customize Settings
Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Close,
Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).

–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or
2.
Alarm Off Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
–
Event: Select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on event (activate) can be overridden only by an
alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.4.6
Blacklist
From BioStar 1.8, ‘Blacklist’ feature is supported with Xpass.
(This feature is available only with FW 1.3v or higher.)
5.1.4.7
Command Card tab
The Command Card tab allows you to issue command cards. For more
information about command cards, please see section 3.2.8.1.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
195
5. Customize Settings

Card ID: Enter the card ID or click Read Card and place a command card on
the reader to automatically populate the fields.

Command Type: Select a type of command card to issue (Enroll Card, Delete
Card, or Delete All Card).
5.1.4.8
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize LED and buzzer behaviors by
event. To save changes to these settings, you must click Update in the
corresponding section for each event.

Event: Specify the affected event by selecting it from the drop-down list.

LED: Set the LED behavior for a specified event.
–
Count: Enter a number of LED cycles for the specified event. Enter “0”
to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the LED.
–
Colors: Specify up to three display colors from the drop-down list.
The LED will cycle through these colors in order, from top to bottom.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
196
5. Customize Settings
Next to each color, enter the duration (in milliseconds) that the LED
should display the selected color and the duration (in milliseconds)
that the LED should remain off before advancing to the next color in
the cycle.

Buzzer: Set the buzzer behavior for a specified event.
–
Count: Enter a number of buzzer cycles for the specified event. Enter
“0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the buzzer.
–
Volume: Set up to three tone volumes from the drop-down list (Low,
Middle, or High). The buzzer will cycle through these volumes in
order, from top to bottom. Next to each volume, enter the duration (in
milliseconds) that the buzzer should maintain the selected volume
and the duration (in milliseconds) that the buzzer should remain off
before advancing to the next volume in the cycle.
–
Fade Out: Set the tone volume to fade out before advancing to the
next volume in the cycle by clicking this checkbox.
5.1.4.9
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for an Xpass device.
Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. To activate the
Wiegand feature for an Xpass device, click the checkbox at the top right of the tab.
For more information on configuring the Wiegand format, see section 3.2.16

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat connected RF
devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical function of
previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will allow RF card
readers to operate independently, which allows them to be associated
with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their own device IDs.

Wiegand Input: Assign the Wiegand input:
–
Disabled: The input will not be used.
–
Wiegand [Card]: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as a
card ID.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
197
5. Customize Settings
–

5.1.5
Wiegand [User]: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as a
user ID.
Wiegand Output: Assign the Wiegand output:
–
Disabled: The output will not be used.
–
Wiegand [Card]: Inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in the ID
field of the Wiegand string.
–
Wiegand [User]: Inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in the ID
field of the Wiegand string.
Customize Settings for Xpass S2 Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for Xpass S2 devices. Customize the
way Xpass S2 devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.1.5.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for Xpass S2 devices.


Xpass S2 Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
Operation Mode: For each of the following options, click the corresponding
checkbox to enable Double Verification Mode, which requires verification
of two users’ credentials to gain entry to a door.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
198
5. Customize Settings
–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
Disable, or custom schedule).
–
Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform card ID matching at
the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this mode is enabled,
the device will send card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode
is useful when you have more users than can be downloaded to a
device or user information cannot be distributed due to security
concerns.

Mifare: Mifare template cards are not supported in the Xpass S2 device.

Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID data
(Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data will be
processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices will
interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
–
Bit Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
5.1.5.2
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for Xpass
S2 devices.

TCP/IP
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
199
5. Customize Settings


Server
–
Use: Click this option button to use specific server settings.
–
Not Use: Click this option button to disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’ time
with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server every
one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when the
device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
Support 100 Base-T: This option allows you to enable or disable a fast
Ethernet connection for the device. When enabled, the device will detect
the Ethernet network and automatically establish the best connection. If
you do not enable this option, the device will attempt to establish a
10Base-T Ethernet connection.

–
Use: Click this option button to enable the 100base-T connection for
the device.
–
Not Use: Click this option button to disable the 100base-T
connection for the device.
RS485
–
Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
Slave, or PC Connection).
–
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.5.3
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings, default
access groups, and T&A mode settings for Xpass S2 devices.

Entrance Limit Setting
–
Timed APB (min): Set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
200
5. Customize Settings
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.

–
Option 1-4: Click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
–
Max Number of Entrance: Set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Access Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied
to new users who have not been assigned to another access group.

Automatic T&A Mode Change
–
T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode for the device (Disable,
Fixed In, Fixed Out, and Auto).
–
Fixed Entrance: When the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify when
to allow entrance events by selecting a timezone (Always, Disable, or
custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a timezone, please see section 3.7.1.
–
Fixed Exit Time: When the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify when
to allow exit events by selecting a timezone (Always, Disable, or
custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a timezone, please see section 3.7.1.
–
In Event Caption: Set a caption for check-in.
–
Out Event Caption: Set a caption for check-out.
5.1.5.4
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for an Xpass S2 device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings.
To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog
box. For more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.

Device: Select the Xpass S2 (or Secure I/O) device for which you will add or
modify settings.

Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure I/O
devices, the following options are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2, Input
3.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
201
5. Customize Settings

Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the input
switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).


Function: Select an action to associate with the input:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Generic Input: The input port will be monitored for a triggering action
(events specified with “Detect Input 1-3” in the Output Setting dialog
box —see section 5.1.5.5).
–
Emergency Open: Open doors controlled by this device. The normal
door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open until an
operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must enter
the master password for a BioStation device or provide
authentication locally for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device.
Schedule: Set the schedule for the input actions (Always, Disable, or custom
schedule).

Duration (ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must last to
trigger the specified action.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
202
5. Customize Settings
5.1.5.5
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for an Xpass device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete output
settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Output
Setting dialog box. For more information about configuring output settings, see
section 3.10.3.1.

Device Type: Select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: Select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these settings
are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.

Alarm On Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.

–
Event: Select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success, Auth
Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance
Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Close,
Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or
2.
Alarm Off Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
203
5. Customize Settings
–
Event: Select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on event (activate) can be overridden only by an
alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.5.6
Command Card tab
The Command Card tab allows you to issue command cards. For more
information about command cards, see section 3.2.8.1.

Card ID: Enter the card ID or click Read Card and place a command card on
the reader to automatically populate the fields.

Command Type: Select a type of command card to issue (Enroll Card, Delete
Card, or Delete All Card).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
204
5. Customize Settings
5.1.5.7
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize LED and buzzer behaviors by
event. To save changes to these settings, you must click Update in the
corresponding section for each event.

Event: Specify the affected event by selecting it from the drop-down list.

LED: Set the LED behavior for a specified event.

–
Count: Enter a number of LED cycles for the specified event. Enter “0”
to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the LED.
–
Colors: Specify up to three display colors from the drop-down list.
The LED will cycle through these colors in order, from top to bottom.
Next to each color, enter the duration (in milliseconds) that the LED
should display the selected color and the duration (in milliseconds)
that the LED should remain off before advancing to the next color in
the cycle.
Buzzer: Set the buzzer behavior for a specified event.
–
Count: Enter a number of buzzer cycles for the specified event. Enter
“0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the buzzer.
–
Volume: Set up to three tone volumes from the drop-down list (Low,
Middle, or High). The buzzer will cycle through these volumes in
order, from top to bottom. Next to each volume, enter the duration (in
milliseconds) that the buzzer should maintain the selected volume
and the duration (in milliseconds) that the buzzer should remain off
before advancing to the next volume in the cycle.
–
Fade Out: Set the tone volume to fade out before advancing to the
next volume in the cycle by clicking this checkbox.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
205
5. Customize Settings
5.1.5.8
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for an Xpass device.
Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. To activate the
Wiegand feature for an Xpass device, click the checkbox at the top right of the tab.
For more information on configuring the Wiegand format, see section 3.2.16.

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat connected RF
devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical function of
previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will allow RF card
readers to operate independently, which allows them to be associated
with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their own device IDs.


5.1.6
Wiegand Input: Assign the Wiegand input:
–
Disabled: The input will not be used.
–
Wiegand [Card]: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as a
card ID.
–
Wiegand [User]: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as a
user ID.
Wiegand Output: Assign the Wiegand output:
–
Disabled: The output will not be used.
–
Wiegand [Card]: Inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in the ID
field of the Wiegand string.
–
Wiegand [User]: Inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in the ID
field of the Wiegand string.
Customize Settings for X-Station Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for X-Station devices. Customize the
way X-Station devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
206
5. Customize Settings
5.1.6.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for X-Station devices.


X-Station Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
1: 1 Operation Mode: The drop-down lists in this area allow you to control
the authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can choose a
normal authentication mode for working hours and a more strict
authentication mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You can
specify authentication modes either by device or by user (see section
5.4.1). Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the device
authentication mode will apply.
–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (No Time,
First Shift, or Always).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
207
5. Customize Settings
–

ID/Card + Password: Set the device to require ID or card plus
password authorization (No Time, First Shift, or Always).
Private Auth: Set the device to allow a private authorization method
(Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of the user will be
determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting, which is located on the
Details tab. If disabled, the authentication mode will be determined by
operation mode settings of the device.

Double Mode: Set the device to require authentication of two users’ access
cards or fingerprints (Always, or No Time). The timeout for presenting the
second authentication is 15 seconds.

Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform card ID matching at the
BioStar server, instead of the device. When this mode is enabled, the
device will send card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode is
useful when you have more users than can be downloaded to a device or
user information cannot be distributed due to security concerns.

Auth Timeout: Set the length of time before the device will timeout when
trying to identify an ID match (5, 10, 15, 20, or 30 sec).

Detect Face: Set the device to capture a face image. Upon successful
authentication, the captured image is stored in the event log and can be
used later for verification purposes.


Mifare
–
Not Use Mifare: Check this box to disable MIFARE card authorization.
–
Use Data Card: Check this box to use the template on the MIFARE
card for authorization.
–
View Mifare Layout: Click this button to view the MIFARE layout used
by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, please see section 3.6.4.7.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID data
(Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data will be
processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices will
interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
–
Bit Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
5.1.6.2
Camera tab
The Camera tab allows you to control how the camera is used for authorization
purposes. In the Timezone field, select a timezone for the specified event. Click
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
208
5. Customize Settings
Add to select an event that will activate the camera. Click Apply to save your
settings.
!
Attention: We recommend that add the authentication events to the camera event
for security. Add only a maximum of 30 events to reduce the network load
between the device and the server.
5.1.6.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for XStation devices.


TCP/IP Setting
–
LAN Type: Select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Disable, or Ethernet).
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
IP
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
–
Max Conn.: Specify the maximum number of connections to allow.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
209
5. Customize Settings


Server
–
Use: Click this option button to enable the server mode.
–
Not Use: Click this option button do disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Server Port: Specify the port used to connect to the server.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’
time with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server
every one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when
the device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
RS485 Network
–

Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, please see
sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
RS485
–
5.1.6.4
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings and
default access groups for an X-Station device.


Entrance Limit Setting
–
Timed APB (min): Set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
–
Option 1-4: Click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
–
Max Number of Entrance: Set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied to new
users who have not been assigned to another access group.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
210
5. Customize Settings
5.1.6.5
Interphone tab
The Interphone tab allows you to set the device to act as an interphone to allow
communication between people on either side of the door.

Type: Select one of the following options:
–
Analogue Interphone: Choose this option to enable the analogue
interphone.
–
IP Interphone: Choose this option to enable the VoIP feature. A
telephone is required.
–
BioStar Videophone: Choose this option to enable the videophone
feature that supports both video and voice calls. The supplied PC
software is required. The BioStar videophone works only with the
device firmware version of FaceStation V1.0 or later.
When you select IP Interphone in the Type drop-down list, specify the following
settings:

VOIP Server IP: Specify an IP address for VOIP server.

VoIP Display Name: Specify a name to use for communication through the
interphone.

VoIP Phone Number: Specify a phone number for the interphone.

VoIP ID: Specify a user name to access the VoIP server.

VoIP Password: Specify a password to access the VoIP server.

Speaker Gain: Specify the volume of the speaker.

Mic Gain: Specify the volume of the microphone.
When you select Videophone in the Type drop-down list, specify the following
settings:

Mode: Specify the videophone purpose (Single or Extension).

Door Control: Check this option if the videophone is used for door access.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
211
5. Customize Settings

Device Password: Enter the videophone device password.
5.1.6.6
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for an X-Station device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings.
To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog
box. For more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.

Device: Select the X-Station device for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure I/O
devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2, Input 3.

Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the input
switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).


Function: Select an action to associate with the input:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Generic Input: The input port will be monitored for a triggering action
(For the events specified with “Detect Input 0-3” in the Output Setting
dialog box, please see section 5.1.1.6).
–
Emergency Open: Open doors controlled by this device. The normal
door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open until an
operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
provide authentication at the device.
Schedule: Set the schedule during which the inputs will be monitored
(Always, First Shift, or No Time).

Duration (ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must last to
trigger the specified action.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
212
5. Customize Settings
5.1.6.7
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for an X-Station device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete output
settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Output
Setting dialog box. For more information about configuring output settings, see
section 3.10.3.1.

Device Type: Select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these settings
are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.

Alarm On Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.

–
Event: Select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success, Auth
Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance
Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Closed,
Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, Detect Input #0-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or
2.
Alarm Off Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
213
5. Customize Settings
–
Event: Select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, a priority 2 “alarm on” event (activate) can be overridden
only by an “alarm off” (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.6.8
Black List tab
The Black list tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers and
prevent them from being authenticated with the device.

Current Count: The total number of user IDs and access cards that have
been registered.

Reserved: The remaining number of user IDs and access cards that can be
registered.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
214
5. Customize Settings
5.1.6.9
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the X-Station display and event
sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must click Apply at the
bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.

Display/Sound
–
Language: Set the language to use on the display (Korean, English, or
Custom).
–
Menu Timeout: Set the length of time before the display will return to
the idle screen.
–
Back Light Timeout: Set the length of time before the display goes
dim (Infinite, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, or 60 sec).
–
Theme: Set a display theme (Theme 1-3).
–
Resource File: Set the language resource file to use for the
X-Station interface (No Change, English, Korean, or Custom). To use a
language resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom
and then click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file.
–
Background: Set the type of background for the X-Station display
(Logo, Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP,
and PNG) cannot exceed 240x320 pixels each. Only one image at a
time can be used as a logo or notice, while up to 16 images can be
displayed (at a set interval) in a slide show.
–
Notice: Click this button to create a notice that will be shown on the
X-Station display. After creating a notice, you can click Apply to apply
the notice to the current device or Apply to Others to apply the notice
to additional devices.
–
Volume: Set the volume of the X-Station device (0% to 100%).
–
Msg Timeout: Set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
215
5. Customize Settings
–

Clock Display: Set to display the current time on the device (Enable or
Disable).
Background Image: Click this checkbox to upload new background images.
Click Add to locate and add a new image file. To delete an existing image,
click the image name and then click Delete.
–

Type: Set the type of background for the X-Station display (Logo,
Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP, and PNG)
cannot exceed 240x320 pixels for Notices and 240x320 pixels for
Logos. Only one image at a time can be used as a logo or notice.
Sound: Click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds. Click
an event from the list and then click Add to locate and add a new sound
file. Click Delete to remove custom sound files or Play to preview a custom
sound file.
5.1.6.10
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for an X-Station
device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you must click Apply at
the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.

T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode:
–
Not Use: Disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
–
Manual: Users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
–
Manual Fix: When a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in that
mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
–
Auto change: The device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
–
Event Fix: The device will perform only the specified T&A function.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
216
5. Customize Settings

T&A Key: Specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event types
associated with them:
–
Function Key: Select a function key from the drop-down list to assign
a T&A event (*1-*15). If you are using the Event Fix mode, you can
click the checkbox to the right to designate a fixed event.
–
Event Caption: Enter a caption for the event.
–
Auto Mode Schedule: When using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the dropdown list. For more information on creating a timezone, see section
3.7.1.
–
Event Type: Set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use, Check
In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check in/out
events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the formal check
in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or the first check–
in and the last check–out events on that day. When you choose
Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as normal checkin/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled, users using the
appropriate keys will be regarded arriving or leaving on time at work
even though they actually come late or leave early. If you enable the
“Only Result” option, they appear being on time on T&A reports but
their work time will be calculated correctly based on their actual
check in/out time. If you choose Out, you can enable the “Add work
time after this event” option. If this option is enabled, users using the
appropriate key will be considered working for the remainder of the
time slot even though they leave the office early.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
217
5. Customize Settings
5.1.6.11
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for an X-Station
device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. For
more information on configuring the Wiegand format, please see section 3.2.16.

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will process ID data from
networked devices and RF card readers in the same way (this is the typical
function of previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will allow RF
card readers to operate independently, which allows them to be
associated with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their own
device IDs.

5.1.7
Wiegand In/Out: Assign the function of the Wiegand input or output:
–
Wiegand (User) In: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a user ID.
–
Wiegand (Card) In: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
–
Wiegand (User) Out: Inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
–
Wiegand (Card) Out: Inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
Customize Settings for BioStation T2 Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for BioStation T2 devices. Customize
the way BioStation T2 devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
218
5. Customize Settings
5.1.7.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for BioStation T2 devices.


BioStation T2 Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
ID Operation Mode: The drop-down lists in this area allow you to control the
authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can choose a normal
authentication mode for working hours and a more strict authentication
mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You can specify
authentication modes either by device or by user (see section 5.4.1).
Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the device authentication
mode will apply.

–
ID + Fingerprint: Set the device to require ID plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Password: Set the device to require ID plus password
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Fingerprint/Password: Set the device to require ID plus
fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require ID plus
fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No Time).
Card Operation Mode
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
219
5. Customize Settings


–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint: Set the device to require card plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Password: Set the device to require card plus password
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint/Password: Set the device to require card plus
fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require card plus
fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No Time).
Fingerprint Operation Mode
–
Fingerprint: Set the device to require only fingerprint authorization
(Always, or No Time).
–
Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require fingerprint plus
password authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Func Key + Fingerprint: Set the device to require function key plus
fingerprint authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Func Key + Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require function
key plus fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No
Time).
Other Options
–
Private Auth: Set the device to allow a private authorization method
(Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of the user
will be determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting, which is
located on the Details tab. If disabled, the authentication mode will be
determined by operation mode settings of the device.
–
Double Mode: Set the device to require authentication of two users’
IDs, access cards or fingerprints (Always, or No Time). The timeout
for presenting the second authentication is 15 seconds.
–
Detect Face: Set the device to capture a face image. Upon successful
authentication, the captured image is stored in the event log.
–
Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform user ID, fingerprint or
card ID matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When
this mode is enabled, the devices will send the user ID, fingerprint
template or card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode is
useful when you have more users than can be downloaded to a
device or user information cannot be distributed due to security
concerns.
–
Matching Timeout: Set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match within the device
itself or via the server (3, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 sec).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
220
5. Customize Settings


Mifare
–
Not Use Mifare: Check this box to disable MIFARE card authorization.
–
Use Template on Card: Check this box to use the template on the
MIFARE card for authorization.
–
View Mifare Layout: Click this button to view the MIFARE layout used
by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, please see section 3.6.4.7.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will be processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected,
devices will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format
settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
–
Bit Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
–
In Double mode, setting option which includes an admin user is
supported. In Double mode, door relay will not open unless an
admin user authenticates within 15 seconds after a normal user
authenticates. If this option is not activated, the door relay will open
when other two users, regardless of whether being a normal user or
an admin user.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioStation 1.93,
BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation 1.3, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2,
BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
–
Use Wiegand Card Bypass: This feature makes the device to send
out Card CSN according to Wiegand setting of BioStar without
having to conduct a matching. This is designed to be used as a
dummy reader in a connection with a third party access control unit
through Wiegand. When a card data input is made, the device sends
out the data through Wiegand without going through a matching
process.
Note: This feature is supported from the FW versions, BioStation 1.93,
BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation 1.3, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2,
BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
5.1.7.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization settings for
BioStation T2 devices.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
221
5. Customize Settings

Fingerprint
–
Security Level: Set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
–
Sensitivity: Set the sensitivity of the fingerprint scanner (0 [Min] to 7
[Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in more easily captured
fingerprint scans, but also increases the sensitivity to external noise.
–
Scan Timeout: Set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
–
1: N Fast Mode: Set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
–
View Image: Set to show or hide fingerprint images on the BioStation
T2 display (Yes or No).
–
Check Fake Finger: Set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
–
Template Option: Displays the global fingerprint template settings.
For more information about fingerprint templates, see section 4.9.
5.1.7.3
Camera tab
The Camera tab allows you to control how the camera is used for authorization
purposes. In the Timezone field, select a timezone for the specified event. Click
Add to select an event that will activate the camera. Click Apply to save your
settings.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
222
5. Customize Settings
!
Attention: We recommend that add the authentication events to the camera event
for security. Add only a maximum of 30 events to reduce the network load
between the device and the server.
5.1.7.4
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
BioStation T2 devices.


TCP/IP Setting
–
LAN Type: Select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Disable, Ethernet, or Wireless LAN).
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
WLAN
–

Change Setting: Click to specify settings for a wireless local area
network (WLAN). This option is active only when WLAN is selected as
the TCP/IP setting. For more information about configuring settings
for a WLAN, see section 3.2.4.
IP
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
223
5. Customize Settings


–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
–
Max Conn.: Specify the maximum number of connections to allow.
Server
–
Use: Click this option button to enable the server mode.
–
Not Use: Click this option button do disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Server Port: Specify the port used to connect to the server.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’
time with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server
every one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when
the device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
RS485 Network
–

RS485
–

Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
RS232
–

Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, please see
sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS232 (9600
to 115200).
USB: Click the option buttons to enable or disable the USB port on the
BioStation T2 device.

USB Memory: Click the option buttons to enable or disable the USB memory
on the BioStation T2 device.
5.1.7.5
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings and
default access groups for a BioStation T2 device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
224
5. Customize Settings


Entrance Limit Setting
–
Timed APB (min): Set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s ID, access card, or
fingerprint authorization for the time period specified here.
–
Option 1-4: Click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
–
Max Number of Entrance: Set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied to new
users who have not been assigned to another access group.
5.1.7.6
Interphone tab
The Interphone tab allows you to set the device to act as an interphone to allow
communication between people on either side of the door.

Type – select one of the following options:
–
Analogue Interphone: Choose this option to enable the analogue
interphone.
–
IP Interphone: Choose this option to enable the VoIP feature. A
telephone is required.
–
BioStar Videophone: Choose this option to enable the videophone
feature that supports both video and voice calls. The supplied PC
software is required. The BioStar videophone works only with the
device firmware version of BioStation T2 V1.1 or later.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
225
5. Customize Settings
When you select IP Interphone in the Type drop-down list, specify the following
settings:

VoIP Server IP: Specify an IP address for the VoIP server.

VoIP Phone Number: Specify a phone number for the interphone.

VoIP Display Name: Specify a name to use for communication through the
interphone.

VoIP ID: Specify a user name to access the VoIP server.

VoIP Password: Specify a password to access the VoIP server.

VoIP Speaker Gain: Specify the volume of the speaker.

VoIP Mic Gain: Specify the volume of the microphone.
5.1.7.7
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioStation T2 device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings.
To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog
box. For more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.

Device: Select the BioStation T2 device for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure I/O
devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2, Input 3.

Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the input
switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).

Function: Select an action to associate with the input:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Generic Input: The input port will be monitored for a triggering action
(events specified with “Detect Input 0-3” in the Output Setting dialog
box —see section 5.1.1.6).
–
Emergency Open: Open doors controlled by this device. The normal
door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open until an
operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
226
5. Customize Settings

–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
provide authentication at the device.
Schedule: Set the schedule during which the inputs will be monitored
(Always or No Time).

Duration (ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must last to
trigger the specified action.
5.1.7.8
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a BioStation T2 device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete output
settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Output
Setting dialog box. For more information about configuring output settings, see
section 3.10.3.1.

Device Type: Select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: Select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these settings
are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.

Alarm On Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
–
Event: Select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success, Auth
Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance
Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Close,
Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
227
5. Customize Settings

–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or
2.
Alarm Off Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
–
Event: Select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or higher priority
(1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For example, a priority 2 “alarm
on” event (activate) can be overridden only by an “alarm off” (deactivate) event
with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.7.9
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers and
prevent them from being authenticated with the device.

Current Count: The total number of the user IDs and access cards that have
been registered.

Reserved : The remaining number of user IDs and access cards to be
registered.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
228
5. Customize Settings
5.1.7.10
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the BioStation T2 display and
event sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must click Apply
at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.

Display/Sound
–
Language: Set the language to use on the display (Korean, English, or
Custom).
–
Menu Timeout: Set the length of time before the display will return to
the idle screen.
–
Backlight Timeout: Set the length of time before the display goes
dim.
–
Theme: set a display theme.
–
Use Voice: Set the device to notify you with voice messages (Disable
or Enable).
–
Resource File: Set the language resource file to use for the BioStar
interface (No Change, English, Korean, or Custom). To use a language
resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom and then
click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file.
–
Background: Set the type of background for the BioStation T2 display
(Logo, Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP,
PNG and PDF) cannot exceed 480x800 pixels each. Only one image
at a time can be used as a logo or notice, while up to 16 images can
be displayed (at a set interval) in a slide show.
–
Volume: Set the volume of the BioStation device (0% to 100%).
–
Msg Timeout: Set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed.
–
Clock Display: Set to display the current time on the device (Enable or
Disable).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
229
5. Customize Settings

Background Image: Click this checkbox to upload new background images.
Click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a new image file.
–

Type: Set the type of background for the BioStation display (Logo or
Notice). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG and PDF) cannot
exceed 480x800 pixels for Notices and 480x800 pixels for Logos.
Only one image at a time can be used as a logo or notice.
Sound: Click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds. Click
an event from the list and then click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a
new sound file. Click Add to add new sound files, Delete to remove sound
files, or Play to preview a selected sound file.
5.1.7.11
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a BioStation
T2 device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you must click Apply
at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.


T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode:
–
Not Use: Disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
–
Manual: Users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
–
Manual Fix: When a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in that
mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
–
Auto change: The device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
–
Event Fix: The device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key: Specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event types
associated with them:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
230
5. Customize Settings
–
Function Key: Select a function key from the drop-down list to assign
a T&A event (F1-F4, EXT01-EXT12). If you are using the Event Fix
mode, you can click the checkbox to the right to designate a fixed
event.
–
Event Caption: Enter a caption for the event.
–
Auto Mode Schedule: When using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the dropdown list. For more information on creating a timezone, please see
section 3.7.1.
–
Event Type: Set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use, Check
In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check in/out
events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the formal check
in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or the first check–
in and the last check–out events on that day. When you choose
Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as normal checkin/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled, users who
activate the appropriate keys will be regarded as arriving or leaving
on time at work even though they actually arrive late or leave early. If
you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being on time on
T&A reports but their work time will be calculated correctly based on
their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out, you can enable the
“Add work time after this event” option. If this option is enabled, users
activating the appropriate key will be considered working for the
remainder of the time slot even if they leave the office early.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
231
5. Customize Settings
5.1.7.12
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a BioStation T2
device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. For
more information on configuring the Wiegand format, see section 3.2.16.

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat connected RF
devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical function of
previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will allow RF card
readers to operate independently, which allows them to be associated
with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their own device IDs.

5.1.8
Wiegand In/Out: Assign the Wiegand input or output:
–
Wiegand (User) In: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a user ID.
–
Wiegand (Card) In: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
–
Wiegand (User) Out: Inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
–
Wiegand (Card) Out: Inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
Customize Settings for FaceStation Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for FaceStation devices. Customize the
way FaceStation devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.1.8.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for FaceStation devices.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
232
5. Customize Settings


FaceStation Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to automatically synchronize the
device time with the time of the host computer.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
ID Operation Mode: The drop-down lists in this area allow you to control the
authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can choose a normal
authentication mode for working hours and a more strict authentication
mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You can specify
authentication modes either by device or by user (see section 5.4.1).
Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the device authentication
mode will apply.
–
ID + Face: Set the device to require ID plus face recognition for
authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
–
ID + Password: Set the device to require ID plus password
authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
–
ID + Face/Password: Set the device to require ID plus face recognition
or password authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
–
ID + Face + Password: Set the device to require ID plus face
recognition plus password authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or
No Time).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
233
5. Customize Settings



Card Operation Mode
–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
New Time Zone, or No Time).
–
Card + Face: Set the device to require card plus face recognition for
authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
–
Card + Password: Set the device to require card plus password
authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
–
Card + Face/Password: Set the device to require card plus face
recognition or password authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or
No Time).
–
Card + Face + Password: Set the device to require card plus face
recognition plus password authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or
No Time).
Face Operation Mode
–
Face: Set the device to require only face recognition for authorization
(Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
–
Face + Password: Set the device to require face recognition plus
password authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
–
Func Key + Face: Set the device to require function key plus face
recognition for authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
–
Func Key + Face + Password: Set the device to require function key
plus face recognition plus password authorization (Always, New Time
Zone, or No Time).
–
Face + Func Key: Set the device to require face recognition plus
function key authorization, and then immediately proceed to T&A
functions (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
–
Face + Password + Func Key: Set the device to require face
recognition plus password plus function key authorization, and then
immediately proceed to T&A functions (Always, New Time Zone, or
No Time).
Other Options
–
Private Auth: Set the device to allow a private authorization method
(Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of the user
will be determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting, which is
located on the Details tab. If disabled, the authentication mode will be
determined by operation mode settings of the device.
–
Double Mode: Set the device to require authentication of two users’
IDs, access cards or face recognitions (Always, New Time Zone, or No
Time). The timeout for presenting the second authentication is 15
seconds.
–
Detect Face: Set the device to capture a face image (Use or Not Use).
Upon successful authentication, the captured image is stored in the
event log.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
234
5. Customize Settings
–


Matching Timeout: Set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match within the device
itself or via the server (3, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 sec).
Mifare
–
Not Use Mifare: Check this box to disable MIFARE card authorization.
–
Use Template on Card: Not available with FaceSation devices.
–
View Mifare Layout: Not available with FaceSation devices.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID data
(Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data will be
processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices will
interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
–
Bit Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
5.1.8.2
Face tab
The Face tab allows you to customize face recognition settings for FaceStation
devices.

Security Level: Set the security level to use for face recognition (Normal,
Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as the security level is
increased, so too is the likelihood of a false rejection.

Enroll Sensitivity: Set the sensitivity of the face recognition system (0 [Min]
to 9 [Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in easier face
recognition, but also increases the sensitivity to external visual noise.

Use Templete Image: Set whether or not to display user face template
images in the FaceStation device.
5.1.8.3
Camera tab
The Camera tab allows you to control how the camera is used for authorization
purposes. In the Timezone field, select a timezone for the specified event. Click
Add to select an event that will activate the camera. Click Apply to save your
settings.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
235
5. Customize Settings
!
Attention: We recommend that add the authentication events to the camera event
for security. Add only a maximum of 30 events to reduce the network load
between the device and the server.
5.1.8.4
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
FaceStation devices.


TCP/IP Setting
–
LAN Type: Select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Disable, Ethernet, or Wireless LAN).
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
WLAN
–

Change Setting: Click to specify settings for a wireless local area
network (WLAN). This option is active only when WLAN is selected as
the TCP/IP setting. For more information about configuring settings
for a WLAN, please see section 3.2.4.
IP
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
236
5. Customize Settings


–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
–
Max Conn.: Specify the maximum number of connections to allow.
Server
–
Use: Click this option button to enable the server mode.
–
Not Use: Click this option button do disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Server Port: Specify the port used to connect to the server.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’
time with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server
every one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when
the device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
RS485 Network
–

RS485
–

Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
RS232
–

Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, please see
sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS232 (9600
to 115200).
USB: Click the option buttons to enable or disable the USB port on the
FaceStation device.

USB Memory: Click the option buttons to enable or disable the USB memory
on the FaceStation device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
237
5. Customize Settings
5.1.8.5
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings and
default access groups for a FaceStation device.


Entrance Limit Setting
–
Timed APB (min): Set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s ID, access card, or
fingerprint authorization for the time period specified here.
–
Option 1-4: Click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
–
Max Number of Entrance: Set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied to new
users who have not been assigned to another access group.
5.1.8.6
Interphone tab
The Interphone tab allows you to set the device to act as an interphone to allow
communication between people on either side of the door.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
238
5. Customize Settings

Type: Select one of the following options:
–
Analogue Interphone: Choose this option to enable the analogue
interphone.
–
IP Interphone: Choose this option to enable the VoIP feature. A
telephone is required.
–
BioStar Videophone: Choose this option to enable the videophone
feature that supports both video and voice calls. The supplied PC
software is required. The BioStar videophone works only with the
device firmware version of FaceStation V1.0 or later.
When you select IP Interphone in the Type drop-down list, specify the following
settings:

VOIP Server IP: Specify an IP address for VOIP server.

VoIP Display Name: Specify a name to use for communication through the
interphone.

VoIP Phone Number: Specify a phone number for the interphone.

VoIP ID: Specify a user name to access the VoIP server.

VoIP Password: Specify a password to access the VoIP server.

Speaker Gain: Specify the volume of the speaker.

Mic Gain: Specify the volume of the microphone.
When you select Videophone in the Type drop-down list, specify the following
settings:

Mode: Specify the videophone purpose (Single or Extension).

Door Control: Check this option if the videophone is used for door access.

Device Password: Enter the videophone device password.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
239
5. Customize Settings
5.1.8.7
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a FaceStation device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings.
To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog
box. For more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.

Device: Select the FaceStation device for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure I/O
devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2, Input 3.

Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the input
switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).


Function: Select an action to associate with the input:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Generic Input: The input port will be monitored for a triggering action
(events specified with “Detect Input 0-3” in the Output Setting dialog
box —see section 5.1.1.6).
–
Emergency Open: Open doors controlled by this device. The normal
door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open until an
operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process face or card inputs.
To enable communication again, an administrator must provide
authentication at the device.
Schedule: Set the schedule during which the inputs will be monitored
(Always or No Time).

Duration (ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must last to
trigger the specified action.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
240
5. Customize Settings
5.1.8.8
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a FaceStation device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete output
settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Output
Setting dialog box. For more information about configuring output settings, see
section 3.10.3.1.

Device Type: Select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.

Port: select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these settings
are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.

Alarm On Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
–
Event: Select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success, Auth
Fail, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance Limited,
Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Close, Forced
Open Door, Held Open Door, Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
–
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or
2.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
241
5. Customize Settings

Alarm Off Event: Specify settings and click Add to add the event to the
Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.

–
Event: Select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance Limited,
Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Close, Forced
Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
–
Device: Select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
Priority: Set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or higher
priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For example, a
priority 2 “alarm on” event (activate) can be overridden only by an “alarm
off” (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.8.9
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the FaceStation display and event
sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must click Apply at the
bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.

Display/Sound
–
Language: Set the language to use on the display (Korean, English, or
Custom).
–
Menu Timeout: Set the length of time before the display will return to
the idle screen (Infinite, 10 sec, 20 sec, or 30 sec).
–
Backlight Timeout: Set the length of time before the display goes dim
(Infinite, 10 sec, 20 sec, 30 sec, 40 sec, 50 sec, or 60 sec).
–
Theme: set a display theme (Theme 1-4)
–
Use Voice: Set the device to notify you with voice messages (Disable
or Enable).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
242
5. Customize Settings

–
Resource File: Set the language resource file to use for the BioStar
interface (No Change, Korean, English, or Custom). To use a language
resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom and then
click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file.
–
Background: Set the type of background for the FaceStation display
(Logo, Notice, Slide Show, or PDF). Supported file types (JPG, GIF,
BMP, PNG and PDF) cannot exceed 480x800 pixels each. Only one
image at a time can be used as a logo or notice, while up to 16
images can be displayed (at a set interval) in a slide show.
–
Volume: Set the volume of the FaceStation device (0% to 100%).
–
Msg Timeout: Set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed (0.5-5 sec).
–
Clock Display: Set to display the current time on the device (Enable or
Disable).
Background Image: Click this checkbox to upload new background images.
Click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a new image file.
–

Type: Set the type of background for the FaceStation display (Logo,
Notice, Slide Show, or PDF). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG
and PDF) cannot exceed 480x800 pixels for Notices and 480x800
pixels for Logos. Only one image at a time can be used as a logo or
notice.
Sound: Click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds. Click
an event from the list and then click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a
new sound file. Click Add to add new sound files, Delete to remove sound
files, or Play to preview a selected sound file.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
243
5. Customize Settings
5.1.8.10
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a FaceStation
device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you must click Apply at
the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.


T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode:
–
Not Use: Disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
–
Manual: Users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
–
Manual Fix: When a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in that
mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
–
Auto change: The device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
–
Event Fix: The device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key: Specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event types
associated with them:
–
Function Key: Select a function key from the drop-down list to assign
a T&A event (F1-F4, EXT01-EXT12). If you are using the Event Fix
mode, you can click the checkbox to the right to designate a fixed
event.
–
Event Caption: Enter a caption for the event.
–
Auto Mode Schedule: When using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the dropdown list. For more information on creating a timezone, see section
3.7.1.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
244
5. Customize Settings
–
5.1.8.11
Event Type: Set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use, Check
In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check in/out
events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the formal check
in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or the first check–
in and the last check–out events on that day. When you choose
Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as normal checkin/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled, users who
activate the appropriate keys will be regarded as arriving or leaving
on time at work even though they actually arrive late or leave early. If
you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being on time on
T&A reports but their work time will be calculated correctly based on
their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out, you can enable the
“Add work time after this event” option. If this option is enabled, users
activating the appropriate key will be considered working for the
remainder of the time slot even if they leave the office early.
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a FaceStation
device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. For
more information on configuring the Wiegand format, see section 3.2.16.

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat connected RF
devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical function of
previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will allow RF card
readers to operate independently, which allows them to be associated
with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their own device IDs.

Wiegand In/Out: Assign the Wiegand input or output:
–
Wiegand (User) In: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a user ID.
–
Wiegand (Card) In: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
245
5. Customize Settings
5.1.9
–
Wiegand (User) Out: Inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
–
Wiegand (Card) Out: Inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
Customize Settings for BioStation 2 Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for BioStation 2 devices. Customize the
way BioStation 2 devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.1.9.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for BioStation 2 devices.


Device Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Time Zone: Select the time zone you wish to use.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
Fingerprint Operation Mode
–
Fingerprint: Set the device to require only fingerprint authorization
(Always, or No Time).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
246
5. Customize Settings
–

Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require fingerprint plus
password authorization (Always, or No Time).
ID Operation Mode: The drop-down lists in this area allow you to control the
authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can choose a normal
authentication mode for working hours and a more strict authentication
mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You can specify
authentication modes either by device or by user (see section 5.4.1).
Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the device authentication
mode will apply.



–
ID + Fingerprint: Set the device to require ID plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Password: Set the device to require ID plus password
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Fingerprint/Password: Set the device to require ID plus
fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require ID plus
fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No Time).
Card Operation Mode
–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint: Set the device to require card plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Password: Set the device to require card plus password
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint/Password: Set the device to require card plus
fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require card plus
fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No Time).
Other Options
–
Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform user ID, fingerprint or
card ID matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When
this mode is enabled, the devices will send the user ID, fingerprint
template or card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode is
useful when you have more users than can be downloaded to a
device or user information cannot be distributed due to security
concerns.
–
Matching Timeout: Set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match within the device
itself or via the server (3, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 sec).
–
Auth Timeout: Sets the standby time (3 seconds – 20 seconds) for
authenticating the next credential when two or more credentials are
used.
View Smartcard Layout
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
247
5. Customize Settings

–
MIFARE: Click this button to view the MIFARE layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring MIFARE layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.7.
–
iCLASS: Click this button to view the iCLASS layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring iCLASS layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.9.
–
DESFire: Click this button to view the DESFire layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring DESFire layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.8.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will be processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected,
devices will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format
settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
Note: The device versions 1.x and 2.x have different methods to read card
data, but BioStar corrects card data, so card data can be used in the
same way. Therefore, MSB/LSB should be set in the same way in
the device versions 1.x and 2.x. The card ID displayed by the device
may be shown as horizontally reversed, since it is displayed based
on Hexa value, but this can be ignored because card data can
nevertheless be read correctly.
–
In Double mode, setting option which includes an admin user is
supported. In Double mode, door relay will not open unless an
admin user authenticates within 15 seconds after a normal user
authenticates. If this option is not activated, the door relay will open
when other two users, regardless of whether being a normal user or
an admin user.
–
Use Wiegand Card Bypass: This feature makes the device to send
out Card CSN according to Wiegand setting of BioStar without
having to conduct a matching. This is designed to be used as a
dummy reader in a connection with a third party access control unit
through Wiegand. When a card data input is made, the device sends
out the data through Wiegand without going through a matching
process.
5.1.9.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization settings for
BioStation 2 devices.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
248
5. Customize Settings

Fingerprint
–
Security Level: Set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
–
Sensitivity: Set the sensitivity of the fingerprint scanner (0 [Min] to 7
[Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in more easily captured
fingerprint scans, but also increases the sensitivity to external noise.
–
Scan Timeout: Set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
–
Advanced Enrollment: Checks the quality of the scanned fingerprint
to avoid the poor quality fingerprint template enrollment. The user
will be alerted when the quality of the fingerprint scanned is low and
given enrollment instructions.
–
1: N Fast Mode: Set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
–
Sensor Mode: If the option is set to Auto On, the sensor will
automatically go on when it detects a finger. If the option is set to
Always On, the sensor will always be on.
–
View Image: Set to show or hide fingerprint images on the BioStation
2 display (Yes or No).
–
Template Option: Displays the global fingerprint template settings.
For more information about fingerprint templates, see section 4.9.
5.1.9.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
BioStation 2 devices.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
249
5. Customize Settings


TCP/IP Setting
–
LAN Type: Select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Ethernet, or Wireless LAN).
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
WLAN
–



Change Setting: Click to specify settings for a wireless local area
network (WLAN). This option is active only when WLAN is selected as
the TCP/IP setting. For more information about configuring settings
for a WLAN, see section 3.2.4.
IP
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
Server
–
Use: Click this option button to enable the server mode.
–
Not Use: Click this option button do disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Server Port: Specify the port used to connect to the server.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’
time with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server
every one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when
the device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
RS485 Network
–
Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Default, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, please see
sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
–
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
250
5. Customize Settings
5.1.9.4
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize default access groups for a
BioStation 2 device.

Default Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied to new
users who have not been assigned to another access group.
5.1.9.5
Interphone tab
The Interphone tab allows you to set the device to act as an interphone to allow
communication between people on either side of the door.

Type
–
5.1.9.6
Analogue Interphone: Choose this option to enable the analogue
interphone.
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioStation 2 device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings.
To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog
box. For more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.


Trigger
–
Device: Select a device which a specific event will be monitored.
–
Type: Select Input or Event.
Input: If the Type of Trigger is set to Input, can be set.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
251
5. Customize Settings
–
Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper).
–
Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).
–
Schedule: Set the schedule during which the inputs will be monitored
(Always or No Time).
–
Duration(ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must
last to trigger the specified action.

Event: Set the trigger event. If the Type of Trigger is set to Event, can be set.

Action


–
Device: Select a device which performs the action.
–
Type: Select Output or Function.
Output: If the Type of Action is set to Output, can be set.
–
Port: Select an output port.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
Function: Select an action to associate with the input. If the Type of Action
is set to Function, can be set.:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
provide authentication at the device.
5.1.9.7
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers and
prevent them from being authenticated with the device.

Current Count: The total number of the user IDs and access cards that have
been registered.

Reserved : The remaining number of user IDs and access cards to be
registered.
5.1.9.8
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the BioStation 2 display and
event sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must click Apply
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
252
5. Customize Settings
at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.


Display/Sound
–
Language: Set the language to use on the display (Korean, English, or
Custom).
–
Menu Timeout: Set the length of time before the display will return to
the idle screen.
–
Backlight Timeout: Set the length of time before the display goes
dim.
–
Theme: set a display theme.
–
Use Voice: Set the device to notify you with voice messages (Disable
or Enable).
–
Resource File: Set the language resource file to use for the BioStar
interface (No Change, English, Korean, or Custom). To use a language
resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom and then
click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file.
–
Background: Set the type of background for the BioStation 2 display
(Logo, Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP,
and PNG) cannot exceed 320x240 pixels each.
–
Notice: Click this button to create a notice that will be shown on the
BioStation 2 display. After creating a notice, you can click Apply to
apply the notice to the current device or Apply to Others to apply the
notice to additional devices.
–
Volume: Set the volume of the BioStation 2 device (0% to 100%).
–
Msg Timeout: Set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed.
–
Clock Display: Set to display the current time on the device (Enable or
Disable).
Background Image: Click this checkbox to upload new background images.
Click Add to locate and add a new image file.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
253
5. Customize Settings

Sound: Click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds. Click
an event from the list and then click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a
new sound file. Click Add to add new sound files, Delete to remove sound
files, or Play to preview a selected sound file.
5.1.9.9
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a BioStation 2
device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you must click Apply at
the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.


T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode:
–
Not Use: Disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
–
Manual: Users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
–
Manual Fix: When a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in that
mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
–
Auto change: The device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
–
Event Fix: The device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key: Specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event types
associated with them:
–
Function Key: Select a function key from the drop-down list to assign
a T&A event (F1-F4, EXT01-EXT12). If you are using the Event Fix
mode, you can click the checkbox to the right to designate a fixed
event.
–
Event Caption: Enter a caption for the event.
–
Auto Mode Schedule: When using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the drop-
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
254
5. Customize Settings
down list. For more information on creating a timezone, please see
section 3.7.1.
–
5.1.9.10
Event Type: Set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use, Check
In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check in/out
events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the formal check
in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or the first check–
in and the last check–out events on that day. When you choose
Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as normal checkin/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled, users who
activate the appropriate keys will be regarded as arriving or leaving
on time at work even though they actually arrive late or leave early. If
you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being on time on
T&A reports but their work time will be calculated correctly based on
their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out, you can enable the
“Add work time after this event” option. If this option is enabled, users
activating the appropriate key will be considered working for the
remainder of the time slot even if they leave the office early.
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a BioStation 2
device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. For
more information on configuring the Wiegand format, see section 3.2.13.

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Extended). The Extended mode will allow RF card readers to operate
independently, which allows them to be associated with doors, included in
zones, and leave logs with their own device IDs.

Wiegand In/Out: Assign the Wiegand input or output:
–
Wiegand (Card) In: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
255
5. Customize Settings
5.1.10 Customize Settings for BioStation A2 Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for BioStation A2 devices. Customize
the way BioStation A2 devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.1.10.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for BioStation A2 devices.



Device Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Time Zone: Select the time zone you wish to use.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
Fingerprint Operation Mode
–
Fingerprint: Set the device to require only fingerprint authorization
(Always, or No Time).
–
Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require fingerprint plus
password authorization (Always, or No Time).
ID Operation Mode: The drop-down lists in this area allow you to control the
authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can choose a normal
authentication mode for working hours and a more strict authentication
mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You can specify
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
256
5. Customize Settings
authentication modes either by device or by user (see section 5.4.1).
Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the device authentication
mode will apply.



–
ID + Fingerprint: Set the device to require ID plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Password: Set the device to require ID plus password
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Fingerprint/Password: Set the device to require ID plus
fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require ID plus
fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No Time).
Card Operation Mode
–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint: Set the device to require card plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Password: Set the device to require card plus password
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint/Password: Set the device to require card plus
fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require card plus
fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No Time).
Other Options
–
Detect Face: Set the device to capture a face image. Upon successful
authentication, the captured image is stored in the event log.
–
Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform user ID, fingerprint or
card ID matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When
this mode is enabled, the devices will send the user ID, fingerprint
template or card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode is
useful when you have more users than can be downloaded to a
device or user information cannot be distributed due to security
concerns.
–
Matching Timeout: Set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match within the device
itself or via the server (3, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 sec).
–
Auth Timeout: Sets the standby time (3 seconds – 20 seconds) for
authenticating the next credential when two or more credentials are
used.
–
Camera Frequency: Sets the camera frequency. If you set the
frequency incorrectly in an environment in which fluorescent light is
used, flickering on the image may occur. Contract a local distributor
for making inquiries. (50 Hz, 60 Hz)
View Smartcard Layout
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
257
5. Customize Settings

–
MIFARE: Click this button to view the MIFARE layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring MIFARE layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.7.
–
iCLASS: Click this button to view the iCLASS layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring iCLASS layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.9.
–
DESFire: Click this button to view the DESFire layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring DESFire layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.8.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will be processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected,
devices will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format
settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
Note: The device versions 1.x and 2.x have different methods to read card
data, but BioStar corrects card data, so card data can be used in the
same way. Therefore, MSB/LSB should be set in the same way in
the device versions 1.x and 2.x. The card ID displayed by the device
may be shown as horizontally reversed, since it is displayed based
on Hexa value, but this can be ignored because card data can
nevertheless be read correctly.
–
In Double mode, setting option which includes an admin user is
supported. In Double mode, door relay will not open unless an
admin user authenticates within 15 seconds after a normal user
authenticates. If this option is not activated, the door relay will open
when other two users, regardless of whether being a normal user or
an admin user.
–
Use Wiegand Card Bypass: This feature makes the device to send
out Card CSN according to Wiegand setting of BioStar without
having to conduct a matching. This is designed to be used as a
dummy reader in a connection with a third party access control unit
through Wiegand. When a card data input is made, the device sends
out the data through Wiegand without going through a matching
process.
5.1.10.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization settings for
BioStation A2 devices.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
258
5. Customize Settings

Fingerprint
–
Security Level: Set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
–
Sensitivity: Set the sensitivity of the fingerprint scanner (0 [Min] to 7
[Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in more easily captured
fingerprint scans, but also increases the sensitivity to external noise.
–
Scan Timeout: Set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
–
Advanced Enrollment: Checks the quality of the scanned fingerprint
to avoid the poor quality fingerprint template enrollment. The user
will be alerted when the quality of the fingerprint scanned is low and
given enrollment instructions.
–
1: N Fast Mode: Set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
–
Sensor Mode: If the option is set to Auto On, the sensor will
automatically go on when it detects a finger. If the option is set to
Always On, the sensor will always be on.
–
View Image: Set to show or hide fingerprint images on the BioStation
A2 display (Yes or No).
–
Check Fake Finger: Set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
–
Template Option: Displays the global fingerprint template settings.
For more information about fingerprint templates, see section 4.9.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
259
5. Customize Settings
5.1.10.3
Camera tab
The Camera tab allows you to control how the camera is used for authorization
purposes. In the Timezone field, select a timezone for the specified event. Click
Add to select an event that will activate the camera. Click Apply to save your
settings.
!
Attention: We recommend that add the authentication events to the camera event
for security. Add only a maximum of 30 events to reduce the network load
between the device and the server.
5.1.10.4
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
BioStation A2 devices.


TCP/IP Setting
–
LAN Type: Select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Ethernet, or Wireless LAN).
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
WLAN
–
Change Setting: Click to specify settings for a wireless local area
network (WLAN). This option is active only when WLAN is selected as
the TCP/IP setting. For more information about configuring settings
for a WLAN, see section 3.2.4.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
260
5. Customize Settings



IP
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
Server
–
Use: Click this option button to enable the server mode.
–
Not Use: Click this option button do disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Server Port: Specify the port used to connect to the server.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’
time with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server
every one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when
the device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
RS485 Network
–
Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Default, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, please see
sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
–
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.10.5
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize default access groups for a
BioStation A2 device.

Default Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied to new
users who have not been assigned to another access group.
5.1.10.6
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioStation A2 device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings.
To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog
box. For more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
261
5. Customize Settings


Trigger
–
Device: Select a device which a specific event will be monitored.
–
Type: Select Input or Event.
Input: If the Type of Trigger is set to Input, can be set.
–
Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper).
–
Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).
–
Schedule: Set the schedule during which the inputs will be monitored
(Always or No Time).
–
Duration(ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must
last to trigger the specified action.

Event: Set the trigger event. If the Type of Trigger is set to Event, can be set.

Action


–
Device: Select a device which performs the action.
–
Type: Select Output or Function.
Output: If the Type of Action is set to Output, can be set.
–
Port: Select an output port.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
Function: Select an action to associate with the input. If the Type of Action
is set to Function, can be set.:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
provide authentication at the device.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
262
5. Customize Settings
5.1.10.7
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers and
prevent them from being authenticated with the device.

Current Count: The total number of the user IDs and access cards that have
been registered.

Reserved : The remaining number of user IDs and access cards to be
registered.
5.1.10.8
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the BioStation A2 display and
event sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must click Apply
at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.

Display/Sound
–
Language: Set the language to use on the display (Korean, English, or
Custom).
–
Menu Timeout: Set the length of time before the display will return to
the idle screen.
–
Backlight Timeout: Set the length of time before the display goes
dim.
–
Theme: set a display theme.
–
Use Voice: Set the device to notify you with voice messages (Disable
or Enable).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
263
5. Customize Settings

–
Resource File: Set the language resource file to use for the BioStar
interface (No Change, English, Korean, or Custom). To use a language
resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom and then
click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file.
–
Background: Set the type of background for the BioStation A2 display
(Logo, Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP,
and PNG) cannot exceed 480x854 pixels each.
–
Notice: Click this button to create a notice that will be shown on the
BioStation A2 display. After creating a notice, you can click Apply to
apply the notice to the current device or Apply to Others to apply the
notice to additional devices.
–
Volume: Set the volume of the BioStation A2 device (0% to 100%).
–
Msg Timeout: Set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed.
–
Clock Display: Set to display the current time on the device (Enable or
Disable).
Background Image: Click this checkbox to upload new background images.
Click Add to locate and add a new image file.

Sound: Click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds. Click
an event from the list and then click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a
new sound file. Click Add to add new sound files, Delete to remove sound
files, or Play to preview a selected sound file.
5.1.10.9
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a BioStation
A2 device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you must click Apply
at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.

T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode:
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
264
5. Customize Settings

–
Not Use: Disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
–
Manual: Users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
–
Manual Fix: When a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in that
mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
–
Auto change: The device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
–
Event Fix: The device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key: Specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event types
associated with them:
–
Function Key: Select a function key from the drop-down list to assign
a T&A event (F1-F4, EXT01-EXT12). If you are using the Event Fix
mode, you can click the checkbox to the right to designate a fixed
event.
–
Event Caption: Enter a caption for the event.
–
Auto Mode Schedule: When using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the dropdown list. For more information on creating a timezone, please see
section 3.7.1.
–
Event Type: Set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use, Check
In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check in/out
events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the formal check
in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or the first check–
in and the last check–out events on that day. When you choose
Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as normal checkin/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled, users who
activate the appropriate keys will be regarded as arriving or leaving
on time at work even though they actually arrive late or leave early. If
you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being on time on
T&A reports but their work time will be calculated correctly based on
their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out, you can enable the
“Add work time after this event” option. If this option is enabled, users
activating the appropriate key will be considered working for the
remainder of the time slot even if they leave the office early.
5.1.10.10 Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a BioStation A2
device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. For
more information on configuring the Wiegand format, see section 3.2.13.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
265
5. Customize Settings

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Extended). The Extended mode will allow RF card readers to operate
independently, which allows them to be associated with doors, included in
zones, and leave logs with their own device IDs.

Wiegand In/Out: Assign the Wiegand input or output:
–
Wiegand (Card) In: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
5.1.11 Customize Settings for BioStation L2 Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for BioStation L2 devices. Customize
the way BioStation L2 devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.1.11.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for BioStation L2 devices.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
266
5. Customize Settings



Device Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Time Zone: Select the time zone you wish to use.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
Fingerprint Operation Mode
–
Fingerprint: Set the device to require only fingerprint authorization
(Always, or No Time).
–
Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require fingerprint plus
password authorization (Always, or No Time).
ID Operation Mode: The drop-down lists in this area allow you to control the
authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can choose a normal
authentication mode for working hours and a more strict authentication
mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You can specify
authentication modes either by device or by user (see section 5.4.1).
Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the device authentication
mode will apply.


–
ID + Fingerprint: Set the device to require ID plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Password: Set the device to require ID plus password
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Fingerprint/Password: Set the device to require ID plus
fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
ID + Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require ID plus
fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No Time).
Card Operation Mode
–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint: Set the device to require card plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Password: Set the device to require card plus password
authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint/Password: Set the device to require card plus
fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
–
Card + Fingerprint + Password: Set the device to require card plus
fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No Time).
Other Options
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
267
5. Customize Settings


–
Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform user ID, fingerprint or
card ID matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When
this mode is enabled, the devices will send the user ID, fingerprint
template or card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode is
useful when you have more users than can be downloaded to a
device or user information cannot be distributed due to security
concerns.
–
Matching Timeout: Set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match within the device
itself or via the server (3, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 sec).
–
Auth Timeout: Sets the standby time (3 seconds – 20 seconds) for
authenticating the next credential when two or more credentials are
used.
View Smartcard Layout
–
MIFARE: Click this button to view the MIFARE layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring MIFARE layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.7.
–
iCLASS: Click this button to view the iCLASS layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring iCLASS layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.9.
–
DESFire: Click this button to view the DESFire layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring DESFire layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.8.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will be processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected,
devices will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format
settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
Note: The device versions 1.x and 2.x have different methods to read card
data, but BioStar corrects card data, so card data can be used in the
same way. Therefore, MSB/LSB should be set in the same way in
the device versions 1.x and 2.x. The card ID displayed by the device
may be shown as horizontally reversed, since it is displayed based
on Hexa value, but this can be ignored because card data can
nevertheless be read correctly.
–
In Double mode, setting option which includes an admin user is
supported. In Double mode, door relay will not open unless an
admin user authenticates within 15 seconds after a normal user
authenticates. If this option is not activated, the door relay will open
when other two users, regardless of whether being a normal user or
an admin user.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
268
5. Customize Settings
–
5.1.11.2
Use Wiegand Card Bypass: This feature makes the device to send
out Card CSN according to Wiegand setting of BioStar without
having to conduct a matching. This is designed to be used as a
dummy reader in a connection with a third party access control unit
through Wiegand. When a card data input is made, the device sends
out the data through Wiegand without going through a matching
process.
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization settings for
BioStation L2 devices.

Fingerprint
–
Security Level: Set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
–
Sensitivity: Set the sensitivity of the fingerprint scanner (0 [Min] to 7
[Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in more easily captured
fingerprint scans, but also increases the sensitivity to external noise.
–
Scan Timeout: Set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
–
Advanced Enrollment: Checks the quality of the scanned fingerprint
to avoid the poor quality fingerprint template enrollment. The user
will be alerted when the quality of the fingerprint scanned is low and
given enrollment instructions.
–
1: N Fast Mode: Set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
269
5. Customize Settings
–
Sensor Mode: If the option is set to Auto On, the sensor will
automatically go on when it detects a finger. If the option is set to
Always On, the sensor will always be on.
–
View Image: Set to show or hide fingerprint images on the BioStation
L2 display (Yes or No).
–
Check Fake Finger: Set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
–
Template Option: Displays the global fingerprint template settings.
For more information about fingerprint templates, see section 4.9.
5.1.11.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
BioStation L2 devices.


TCP/IP Setting
–
LAN Type: Select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Ethernet, or Wireless LAN).
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
WLAN
–


Change Setting: Click to specify settings for a wireless local area
network (WLAN). This option is active only when WLAN is selected as
the TCP/IP setting. For more information about configuring settings
for a WLAN, see section 3.2.4.
IP
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
Server
–
Use: Click this option button to enable the server mode.
–
Not Use: Click this option button do disable server settings.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
270
5. Customize Settings

–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Server Port: Specify the port used to connect to the server.
–
Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’
time with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server
every one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when
the device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
RS485 Network
–
Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Default, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, please see
sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
–
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.11.4
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize default access groups for a
BioStation L2 device.

Default Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied to new
users who have not been assigned to another access group.
5.1.11.5
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioStation L2 device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings.
To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog
box. For more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.

Trigger
–
Device: Select a device which a specific event will be monitored.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
271
5. Customize Settings
–

Type: Select Input or Event.
Input: If the Type of Trigger is set to Input, can be set.
–
Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper).
–
Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).
–
Schedule: Set the schedule during which the inputs will be monitored
(Always or No Time).
–
Duration(ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must
last to trigger the specified action.

Event: Set the trigger event. If the Type of Trigger is set to Event, can be set.

Action


–
Device: Select a device which performs the action.
–
Type: Select Output or Function.
Output: If the Type of Action is set to Output, can be set.
–
Port: Select an output port.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
Function: Select an action to associate with the input. If the Type of Action
is set to Function, can be set.:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
provide authentication at the device.
5.1.11.6
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers and
prevent them from being authenticated with the device.

Current Count: The total number of the user IDs and access cards that have
been registered.

Reserved : The remaining number of user IDs and access cards to be
registered.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
272
5. Customize Settings
5.1.11.7
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the BioStation L2 display and
event sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must click Apply
at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.


Display/Sound
–
Language: Set the language to use on the display (Korean, English, or
Custom).
–
Menu Timeout: Set the length of time before the display will return to
the idle screen.
–
Backlight Timeout: Set the length of time before the display goes
dim.
–
Theme: set a display theme.
–
Use Voice: Set the device to notify you with voice messages (Disable
or Enable).
–
Resource File: Set the language resource file to use for the BioStar
interface (No Change, English, Korean, or Custom). To use a language
resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom and then
click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file.
–
Background: Set the type of background for the BioStation L2 display
(Logo, Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP and
PNG) cannot exceed 220x176 pixels each.
–
Notice: Click this button to create a notice that will be shown on the
BioStation L2 display. After creating a notice, you can click Apply to
apply the notice to the current device or Apply to Others to apply the
notice to additional devices.
–
Volume: Set the volume of the BioStation L2 device (0% to 100%).
–
Msg Timeout: Set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed.
–
Clock Display: Set to display the current time on the device (Enable or
Disable).
Background Image: Click this checkbox to upload new background images.
Click Add to locate and add a new image file.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
273
5. Customize Settings

Sound: Click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds. Click
an event from the list and then click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a
new sound file. Click Add to add new sound files, Delete to remove sound
files, or Play to preview a selected sound file.
5.1.11.8
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a BioStation L2
device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you must click Apply at
the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.


T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode:
–
Not Use: Disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
–
Manual: Users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
–
Manual Fix: When a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in that
mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
–
Auto change: The device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
–
Event Fix: The device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key: Specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event types
associated with them:
–
Function Key: Select a function key from the drop-down list to assign
a T&A event (F1-F4, EXT01-EXT12). If you are using the Event Fix
mode, you can click the checkbox to the right to designate a fixed
event.
–
Event Caption: Enter a caption for the event.
–
Auto Mode Schedule: When using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the drop-
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
274
5. Customize Settings
down list. For more information on creating a timezone, please see
section 3.7.1.
–
5.1.11.9
Event Type: Set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use, Check
In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check in/out
events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the formal check
in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or the first check–
in and the last check–out events on that day. When you choose
Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as normal checkin/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled, users who
activate the appropriate keys will be regarded as arriving or leaving
on time at work even though they actually arrive late or leave early. If
you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being on time on
T&A reports but their work time will be calculated correctly based on
their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out, you can enable the
“Add work time after this event” option. If this option is enabled, users
activating the appropriate key will be considered working for the
remainder of the time slot even if they leave the office early.
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a BioStation L2
device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. For
more information on configuring the Wiegand format, see section 3.2.13.

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Extended). The Extended mode will allow RF card readers to operate
independently, which allows them to be associated with doors, included in
zones, and leave logs with their own device IDs.

Wiegand In/Out: Assign the Wiegand input or output:
–
Wiegand (Card) In: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
275
5. Customize Settings
5.1.12 Customize Settings for BioEntry W2 Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for BioEntry W2 devices. Customize the
way BioEntry W2 devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.1.12.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various operation
modes settings for BioStation L2 devices.


Device Time
–
Date: Manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
–
Time: Manually set the device time.
–
Time Zone: Select the time zone you wish to use.
–
Get Host PC Time: Check this box to get the time of the local PC
which BioStar client program is installed on. The time will be
displayed in the Date and Time spin boxes right below this option and
you can set the device’s time to match this time by clicking Set
Device Time.
–
Get Device Time: Get the current time displayed by the device.
–
Set Device Time: Set the time on the device.
Fingerprint Operation Mode
–

Fingerprint: Set the device to require only fingerprint authorization
(Always, or No Time).
Card Operation Mode
–
Card Only: Set the device to require only card authorization (Always,
or No Time).
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
276
5. Customize Settings
–



Card + Fingerprint: Set the device to require card plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
Other Options
–
Server Matching: Enable this setting to perform user ID, fingerprint or
card ID matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When
this mode is enabled, the devices will send the user ID, fingerprint
template or card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode is
useful when you have more users than can be downloaded to a
device or user information cannot be distributed due to security
concerns.
–
Matching Timeout: Set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match within the device
itself or via the server (3, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 sec).
–
Auth Timeout: Sets the standby time (3 seconds – 20 seconds) for
authenticating the next credential when two or more credentials are
used.
View Smartcard Layout
–
MIFARE: Click this button to view the MIFARE layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring MIFARE layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.7.
–
iCLASS: Click this button to view the iCLASS layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring iCLASS layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.9.
–
DESFire: Click this button to view the DESFire layout used by the
device. For more information about configuring DESFire layouts,
please see section 3.6.4.8.
Card ID Format
–
Format Type: Set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will be processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected,
devices will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format
settings.
–
Byte Order: Specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
Note: The device versions 1.x and 2.x have different methods to read card
data, but BioStar corrects card data, so card data can be used in the
same way. Therefore, MSB/LSB should be set in the same way in
the device versions 1.x and 2.x. The card ID displayed by the device
may be shown as horizontally reversed, since it is displayed based
on Hexa value, but this can be ignored because card data can
nevertheless be read correctly.
–
In Double mode, setting option which includes an admin user is
supported. In Double mode, door relay will not open unless an
admin user authenticates within 15 seconds after a normal user
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
277
5. Customize Settings
authenticates. If this option is not activated, the door relay will open
when other two users, regardless of whether being a normal user or
an admin user.
–
5.1.12.2
Use Wiegand Card Bypass: This feature makes the device to send
out Card CSN according to Wiegand setting of BioStar without
having to conduct a matching. This is designed to be used as a
dummy reader in a connection with a third party access control unit
through Wiegand. When a card data input is made, the device sends
out the data through Wiegand without going through a matching
process.
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization settings for
BioEntry W2 devices.

Fingerprint
–
Security Level: Set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
–
Sensitivity: Set the sensitivity of the fingerprint scanner (0 [Min] to 7
[Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in more easily captured
fingerprint scans, but also increases the sensitivity to external noise.
–
Scan Timeout: Set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
–
Advanced Enrollment: Checks the quality of the scanned fingerprint
to avoid the poor quality fingerprint template enrollment. The user
will be alerted when the quality of the fingerprint scanned is low and
given enrollment instructions.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
278
5. Customize Settings
–
1: N Fast Mode: Set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
–
Sensor Mode: If the option is set to Auto On, the sensor will
automatically go on when it detects a finger. If the option is set to
Always On, the sensor will always be on.
–
Check Fake Finger: Set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
–
Template Option: Displays the global fingerprint template settings.
For more information about fingerprint templates, see section 4.9.
5.1.12.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for BioEntry
W2 devices.



TCP/IP Setting
–
LAN Type: Select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Ethernet).
–
Port: Specify a port to use for the device.
IP
–
Use DHCP: Click this option button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
–
Not Use DHCP: Click this option button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the device.
–
Subnet: Specify a subnet address for the device.
–
Gateway: Specify a network gateway.
Server
–
Use: Click this option button to enable the server mode.
–
Not Use: Click this option button do disable server settings.
–
IP Address: Specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
–
Server Port: Specify the port used to connect to the server.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
279
5. Customize Settings
–

Time Sync with Server: Check this box to synchronize the device’
time with the server. The device polls for a time change on the server
every one hour and its time will be synchronized with the server when
the device’s time and the server’s time differ by more than 5 seconds.
RS485 Network
–
Mode: Set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Default, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, please see
sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
–
Baudrate: Set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.12.4
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize default access groups for a
BioEntry W2 device.

Default Group Setting: Select a default access group to be applied to new
users who have not been assigned to another access group.
5.1.12.5
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioEntry W2 device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input settings.
To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input Setting dialog
box. For more information about configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.


Trigger
–
Device: Select a device which a specific event will be monitored.
–
Type: Select Input or Event.
Input: If the Type of Trigger is set to Input, can be set.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
280
5. Customize Settings
–
Port: Select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper).
–
Switch: Click the option buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O: normally open or N/C: normally closed).
–
Schedule: Set the schedule during which the inputs will be monitored
(Always or No Time).
–
Duration(ms): Set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must
last to trigger the specified action.

Event: Set the trigger event. If the Type of Trigger is set to Event, can be set.

Action


–
Device: Select a device which performs the action.
–
Type: Select Output or Function.
Output: If the Type of Action is set to Output, can be set.
–
Port: Select an output port.
–
Signal Setting: Select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port Setting).
Function: Select an action to associate with the input. If the Type of Action
is set to Function, can be set.:
–
Not Use: The input port will not be monitored.
–
Release All Alarms: Cancel alarms associated with this device.
–
Restart Device: Restart the device.
–
Disable Device: Disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
provide authentication at the device.
5.1.12.6
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers and
prevent them from being authenticated with the device.

Current Count: The total number of the user IDs and access cards that have
been registered.

Reserved : The remaining number of user IDs and access cards to be
registered.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
281
5. Customize Settings
5.1.12.7
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize LED and buzzer behaviors by
event. To save changes to these settings, you must click Update in the
corresponding section for each event.

Event: Specify the affected event by selecting it from the drop-down list.

LED: Set the LED behavior for a specified event.


–
Count: Enter a number of LED cycles for the specified event. Enter “0”
to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the LED.
–
Colors: Specify up to three display colors from the drop-down list.
The LED will cycle through these colors in order, from top to bottom.
Next to each color, enter the duration (in milliseconds) that the LED
should display the selected color and the duration (in milliseconds)
that the LED should remain off before advancing to the next color in
the cycle.
Buzzer: Set the buzzer behavior for a specified event.
–
Count: Enter a number of buzzer cycles for the specified event. Enter
“0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the buzzer.
–
Volume: Set up to three tone volumes from the drop-down list (Low,
Middle, or High). The buzzer will cycle through these volumes in
order, from top to bottom. Next to each volume, enter the duration (in
milliseconds) that the buzzer should maintain the selected volume
and the duration (in milliseconds) that the buzzer should remain off
before advancing to the next volume in the cycle.
Fade Out: Set the tone volume to fade out before advancing to the next
volume in the cycle by clicking this checkbox.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
282
5. Customize Settings
5.1.12.8
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode settings for a BioEntry W2 device.
To save changes to time and attendance settings, you must click Apply at the
bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings to other devices by
clicking Apply to Others.


T&A Mode: Set the time and attendance mode:
–
Disable: Disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
–
Fixed In: The device will perform only the check in event.
–
Fixed Out: The device will perform only the check out event.
–
Auto: The device will automatically change T&A modes to correspond
with the functions specified for a time period.
Fixed Entrance: When using the Auto for T&A Mode, you can specify when
the check in event will occur by selecting a timezone in the drop-down list.
For more information on creating a timezone, please see section 3.7.1.

Fixed Exit Time: When using the Auto for T&A Mode, you can specify when
the check out event will occur by selecting a timezone in the drop-down
list. For more information on creating a timezone, please see section 3.7.1.

In Event Caption: Enter a caption for the check in event.

Out Event Caption: Enter a caption for the check out event.
5.1.12.9
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a BioEntry W2
device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. For
more information on configuring the Wiegand format, see section 3.2.16.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
283
5. Customize Settings

Wiegand Mode: Set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading card ID
data (Extended). The Extended mode will allow RF card readers to operate
independently, which allows them to be associated with doors, included in
zones, and leave logs with their own device IDs.

Wiegand In/Out: Assign the Wiegand input or output:
–
5.2
Wiegand (Card) In: The ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
Customize Door Settings
The sections below describe the settings available for doors that have been added to the
BioStar system. Customize the way these doors function by changing settings to suit your
particular environment and operational needs. To access the tabs described below, click
Doors in the shortcut pane, then click a door name.
!
Attention: A 2.x device (BioStation A2, BioStation 2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2) cannot
configure the door together with a 1.x device (BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, BioLite
Net, Xpass, Xpass S2, X-Station, BioStation T2, FaceStation).
5.2.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to specify which devices are used on the inside or outside of a
door, how the devices control the door, and anti-passback features. When connecting two
devices to a single door, the devices should be connected to each other by RS485. In this
case, the I/O ports of only one device can be used. Specify which device’s I/O ports to use
in the “IO Device” drop-down list.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
284
5. Customize Settings

Inside Device: Select a device to use on the inside of the door.

Outside Device: Select a device to use on the outside of the door.

Unlock Time: Select a schedule when the door should normally be unlocked. During
this time, door relays are active.

Lock Time: Select a schedule when the door should normally be locked. During this
time, door relays are inactive.

IO Device: When using two devices on a single door, specify which device’s IO ports
will be used.

Door Relay: Select a door relay.

Exit Button: Select a device input to use for an exit button (Disable or Input 0 and Input
1 for each device added).

(Switch Type): Set the normal position of the input used for an exit button (N/Onormally open or N/C-normally closed).

Door Status: set an input for a sensor that detects the current status of the door.

(Switch Type): Set the normal position of the input used for a door status sensor (N/Onormally open or N/C-normally closed).

Door Open Period (sec): Set the duration (in seconds) that a door relay should be
activated when a door is opened. After this duration, the relay will stop sending the
signal to open the door. The default is three seconds.

Door Open Alarm (sec): Set the duration (in seconds) that a door can remain open
before an alarm will sound.

Driven by: Select types of events that will trigger associated devices to open the door.
–
All Events (default): Associated devices will open the door on any successful
authorization events.
–
TNA + AUTH: Associated devices will open the door on successful T&A or
credential authorization events or T&A authorization events. To use this option,
you must select the Use Relay checkbox in the T&A tab. This option is only
available for BioStation, BioLite Net, X-Station, BioStation T2, FaceStation, and
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
285
5. Customize Settings
BioStation 2, BioStation A2, and BioStation L2 devices. For more information
about configuring T&A settings, see section 5.1.1.9, 5.1.3.9, 5.1.6.10, 5.1.7.11,
5.1.8.10, 5.1.9.9, 5.1.10.9, and 5.1.11.8.


–
AUTH: Associated devices will open the door only on successful credential
authorization events.
–
TNA: Associated devices will open the door only on successful T&A authorization
events. To use this option, you must select the Use Relay checkbox in the T&A tab.
This option is only available for BioStation, BioLite Net, X-Station, BioStation T2,
FaceStation, BioStation 2, BioStation A2, and BioStation L2 devices. For more
information about configuring T&A settings, see section 5.1.1.9, 5.1.3.9, 5.1.6.10,
5.1.7.11, 5.1.8.10, 5.1.9.9, 5.1.10.9, and 5.1.11.8.
–
Disabled: Associated devices will not open the door, regardless of the attempted
authorization events.
Closed by: Select an option for closing the door.
–
Open Period: The BioStar system will close the door after the period specified in
the Door Open Period (sec) field.
–
Open Period+Status: The BioStar system will attempt to close the door based on
door status (if you have connected door sensors and the system can detect that
the door is open). If door sensors are not connected or the system is unable to
detect the door status, the system will close the door after the period specified in
the Door Open Period (sec) field. This setting is useful when used with revolving
doors, for example, to prevent someone from following an authorized person
through the door.
Anti-passback: Click the checkbox to activate the anti-passback feature (only
available when using both an inside and an outside device).

–
Device Name: This field is populated automatically.
–
Device IP: This field is populated automatically.
–
APB Type: Set the type of anti-passback restriction to use (Soft or Hard).
–
Reset Time (min): Set the duration (in minutes) that must pass before the antipassback status is reset. The default reset time is 0—at this setting, the antipassback status will not be reset.
Unlock Trigger Option
–

Unlock Trigger Option: Unlock Trigger is supported in the ‘Details’ tab in the door
setting. This feature allows the door to be remained open during Unlock Time only
after an Admin User or Normal User identification.
Note: Supported Firmware Versions: BioStation 1.93, BioStation T2 1.3, FaceStation
1.3, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2, BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3. 2.x devices
(BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2) are not supported.
Note: Unlock Trigger is not supported when two devices (Host/Slave device or 3rd
Party Wiegand reader) are configured for one door and Unlock Trigger was made
from the slave device. And when the case that 3rd Party Wiegand reader is
configured for one door is not supported. And it’s supported only when a triger was
made from one Host device.
Minimum Input Duration
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
286
5. Customize Settings
–
Minimum Input Duration: This feature can be activated from ‘Details’ tab in the door
setting. When this option is in use, the device accepts input signal only when the
signal continues more than a certain period of time designated by the FW fix. This
option is activated with the latest FW and shown Use or Not Use.
Note: Supported Firmware Versions: BioStation 1.93, BioStation T2 1.3,
FaceStation 1.3, BioEntry Plus 1.6, BioEntry W 1.2, BioLite Net 1.4, Xpass 1.3.
5.2.2
Alarm tab
The Alarm tab allows you to specify alarm actions for doors that are forced open or held
open. A forced open alarm occurs when a door is forcibly opened without any
authentication at the device. A held open alarm occurs when a door remains open longer
than the duration specified in the system settings.

Action
–
Program Sound: Activate and select a sound from the drop-down list to be
emitted by the BioStar program. Then, specify the duration (“play count”) of the
sound in seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0, the specified sound will play until
someone with administrative privileges manually stops the sound via the Realtime
Monitoring tab in the Monitoring pane. To add custom sounds to the list, see
section 3.10.1.2.
–
Device Sound: Activate and select a sound to be emitted by devices connected to
the door.
–
Send Email: Activate and setup emails to be sent by the system. For more
information about sending alert emails, see section 3.10.2.
–
Output Device: Activate and select a device to output an alarm signal.
–
Output Port: Select an output port to use when sending the alarm signal.
–
Output Signal Setting: Select an output signal to send.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
287
5. Customize Settings
5.3
Customize Zone Settings
Customize the way zones function by changing the settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs. To access the tabs described below, click Doors in the
shortcut pane, then click a zone name.
5.3.1
Customize Settings for Anti-Passback Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for anti-passback zones. Customize the
way the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your particular environment and
operational needs.
!
Attention: A 2.x device (BioStation A2, BioStation 2, BioStation L2, BioEntry W2) cannot
configure a zone together with a 1.x device (BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, BioLite
Net, Xpass, Xpass S2, X-Station, BioStation T2, FaceStation). Also, BioStation A2,
BioStation 2, BioStation L2 and BioEntry W2 can configure only a dual access device zone
and a fire alarm zone.
5.3.1.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to specify which anti-passback type to use for a zone
and the reset period for the anti-passback feature.

APB Type: Select a type of anti-passback restriction to apply (Soft or Hard).

Reset Time (min): Set the duration (in minutes) that must pass before the
anti-passback status is reset. The default reset time is 0—at this setting,
the anti-passback status will not be reset.

In case of Disconnected: Set how doors in the zone should behave if
communication is lost between the master and member devices.
5.3.1.2
Alarm tab
The Alarm tab allows you to specify alarm actions and an output device for an
anti-passback zone.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
288
5. Customize Settings

Action
–
Program Sound: Activate and select a sound from the drop-down list
to be emitted by the BioStar program. Then, specify the duration
(“play count”) of the sound in seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0,
the specified sound will play until someone with administrative
privileges manually stops the sound via the Realtime Monitoring tab
in the Monitoring pane. To add custom sounds to the list, see section
3.10.1.2.
–
Device Sound: Activate and select a sound to be emitted by devices
connected to the door.
–
Send Email: Activate and setup emails to be sent by the system. For
more information about sending alert emails, see section 3.10.2.
–
Output Device: activate and select a device to output an alarm signal.
–
Output Port: Select an output port to use when sending the alarm
signal.
–
Output Signal: Select an output signal to send.
5.3.1.3
Access Group tab
The Access Group tab allows you to specify access groups that can bypass
normal restrictions for the zone. To grant bypass rights to an access group, select
a group and click Apply at the bottom right of the Zone pane.
5.3.2
Customize Settings for Entrance Limit Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for entrance limit zones. Customize the
way the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your particular environment and
operational needs.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
289
5. Customize Settings
5.3.2.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to specify entrance limits and a schedule for the zone
restrictions.

Entrance Limit Zone Setting: Click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit
setting, and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.

Max Number of Entrance: Set the maximum number of entries allowed
during the specified time limit.

Timed APB (min): Specify a time limit for re-entry into a zone.

In case of Disconnected: Set how doors in the zone should behave if
communication is lost between the master and member devices.
5.3.2.2
Alarm tab
The Alarm tab allows you to specify alarm actions and an output device for an
entrance limit zone.

Action
–
Program Sound: Activate and select a sound from the drop-down list
to be emitted by the BioStar program. Then, specify the duration
(“play count”) of the sound in seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0,
the specified sound will play until someone with administrative
privileges manually stops the sound via the Realtime Monitoring tab
in the Monitoring pane. To add custom sounds to the list, see section
3.10.1.2.
–
Device Sound: Activate and select a sound to be emitted by devices
connected to the door.
–
Send Email: Activate and setup emails to be sent by the system. For
more information about sending alert emails, see section 3.10.2.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
290
5. Customize Settings
–
Output Device: Activate and select a device to output an alarm signal.
–
Output Port: Select an output port to use when sending the alarm
signal.
–
Output Signal: Select an output signal to send.
5.3.2.3
Access Group tab
The Access Group tab allows you to specify access groups that can bypass
normal restrictions for the zone. To grant bypass rights to an access group, select
a group and click Apply at the bottom right of the Zone pane.
5.3.3
Customize Settings for Alarm Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for alarm zones. Customize the way the
zone functions by changing these settings to suit your particular environment and
operational needs.
!
Attention: Arm/disarm cannot be set for a door or a zone configured with BioStation A2,
BioStation 2, BioStation L2 and BioEntry W2.
5.3.3.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to specify alarm delays and arm/disarm types for
alarm zones.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
291
5. Customize Settings


Delay (sec)
–
Arm: Set the length of time (in seconds) to delay before arming the
zone.
–
Disarm: Set the length of time (in seconds) to delay before disarming
the zone.
Arm/Disarm Type: Specify settings for arming or disarming zones. For more
information for configuring arm and disarm settings, see 3.5.2.5. For more
information on setting up alarms, see section 3.10.

External Input/Out: Specify settings for enabling the BioStar system to
antomatically arming or disarming zones. For more information on
configuring external input/output settings, see 3.5.2.6. For more
information on setting up alarms, see section 3.10.
5.3.3.2
Alarm tab
The Alarm tab allows you to specify alarm actions and an output device for an
alarm zone.

Action
–
Program Sound: Activate and select a sound from the drop-down list
to be emitted by the BioStar program. Then, specify the duration
(“play count”) of the sound in seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0,
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
292
5. Customize Settings
the specified sound will play until someone with administrative
privileges manually stops the sound via the Realtime Monitoring tab
in the Monitoring pane. To add custom sounds to the list, see section
3.10.1.2.
–
Device Sound: Activate and select a sound to be emitted by devices
connected to the door.
–
Send Email: Activate and setup emails to be sent by the system. For
more information about sending alert emails, see section 3.10.2.
–
Output Device: Activate and select a device to output an alarm signal.
–
Output Port: Select an output port to use when sending the alarm
signal.
–
Output Signal: Select an output signal to send.
5.3.3.3
Access Group tab
The Access Group tab allows you to specify access groups that can arm and
disarm zones. To grant disarm authorization to an access group, select a group
and click Apply at the bottom right of the Zone pane.
5.3.4
Customize Settings for Fire Alarm Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for fire alarm zones. Customize the way
the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your particular environment and
operational needs.
5.3.4.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to add or delete devices in the Device List and inputs to
the Input List. To add or delete devices, see section 3.5.2.2.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
293
5. Customize Settings
5.3.4.2
Alarm tab
The Alarm tab allows you to specify alarm actions and an output device for a fire
alarm zone.

Action
–
Program Sound: Activate and select a sound from the drop-down list
to be emitted by the BioStar program. Then, specify the duration
(“play count”) of the sound in seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0,
the specified sound will play until someone with administrative
privileges manually stops the sound via the Realtime Monitoring tab
in the Monitoring pane. To add custom sounds to the list, see section
3.10.1.2.
–
Device Sound: Activate and select a sound to be emitted by devices
connected to the door.
–
Send Email: Activate and setup emails to be sent by the system. For
more information about sending alert emails, see section 3.10.2.
–
Output Device: Activate and select a device to output an alarm signal.
–
Output Port: Select an output port to use when sending the alarm
signal.
–
Output Signal: Select an output signal to send.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
294
5. Customize Settings
5.3.5
Customize Settings for Access Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for access zones. These zones are used
to synchronize user data, so the Alarm and Access Group tabs are unavailable. Customize
the way the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your particular environment
and operational needs.
5.3.5.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to add devices to the Device List.

Synchronize User Info: Click this checkbox to automatically propagate user
information to other devices.

Synchronize Log Data: Click this checkbox to automatically write all log
records to the master device (for member devices in the zone).

Synchronize Time: Click this checkbox to synchronize the time of devices in
the zone.
5.3.6
Customize Settings for Muster Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for muster zones. These zones are used
to monitors user locations, so the Alarm tab is unavailable. Customize the way the zone
functions by changing these settings to suit your particular environment and operational
needs.
5.3.6.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to add devices to the Device List.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
295
5. Customize Settings

Muster Zone Type: By default, set to Manual. You can check for the people
who were present in a specified area for a specific time period. Please see
4.1.1 to see how to manually check attedance of people.

Tracking Time (hour): Specify how far (in hours) people are monitored for
their in/out activities in the zone. For example, if you set this value to 8,
you can track a record of attendace since 8 hours ago.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
296
5. Customize Settings
5.3.6.2
Access Group tab
The Access Group tab allows you to specify access groups that belong to a
muster zone. To assign access groups to a muster zone, select a group and click
Apply at the bottom right of the Zone pane.
5.3.7
Customize Settings for Interlock Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for interlock zones. Customize the way
the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your particular environment and
operational needs.
Interlock zones works only with the following device firmware versions:

FaceStation V1.3 or later, BioStation T2 V1.3 or later, BioStation V1.9 or later, BioEntry
Plus V1.5 or later, BioEntry W V1.0 or later, BioLite Net V1.3 or later, Xpass V1.2 or later,
and X-Station V1.3 or later.

Interlock zones are not supported for D-Station, BioStation 2, BioStation A2, BioStation
L2 and BioEntry W2.
5.3.7.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to specify which doors to use for either side of the
interlock zone. Once added, the door names and device IDs will appear in the
Device List.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
297
5. Customize Settings

Door 1: Click the ellipsis (…) button to select door 1 of the interlock area.
Doors without associated devices cannot be added to the interlock zone.

Door 2: Click the ellipsis (…) button to select the device on door 2 of the
interlock area. Doors without associated devices cannot be added to the
interlock zone.
5.4
Customize User Settings
Customize various settings for users, including personal details, fingerprint information,
and access card information. To access the tabs described below, click Users in the
shortcut pane, then click a user name.
5.4.1
Details Tab
The Details tab allows you to specify personal information about a user and the valid dates
of a user account. To edit these fields, see section 4.5.3.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
298
5. Customize Settings

ID: Enter an identification number for a user.

Start Date: Set a beginning date that the user can obtain authorization via the BioStar
system.

Expiry Date: Set a date that the user's account will expire (you can also specify the
hour that the account will expire).

Private Auth Mode: Set the authorization method for the user (Device Default,
Fingerprint, Fingerprint + Password, Card Only, Card + Fingerprint, Card + Password,
Card + Fingerprint/Password, Card + Fingerprint + Password, ID + Fingerprint, ID +
Password, ID + Fingerprint/Password, ID + Fingerprint + Password). If you set the
method to “Device Default,” the authentication mode will be determined by operation
mode settings of the device.

Title: Select a title for the user (Guest, President, Director, General Manager, Chief,
Assistant Manager, or custom title).

Mobile: Enter a mobile telephone number for a user.

Gender: Select a user's gender.

Date of Birth: Select a user's date of birth from the drop-down calendar.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
299
5. Customize Settings
5.4.2
Fingerprints Tab
The Fingerprints tab allows you to specify which type of scanner to use for enrollment and
the security level to apply. This tab can also be used to test for fingerprint matches and
register duress fingerprints. For more information about registering fingerprints, see
section 3.6.2.

Enroll Device: Select a device to use for scanning fingerprints.

1: 1 Security Level: Select a security level to use for fingerprint authorization (Device
Default and Lowest [1/1,000] to Highest [1/10,000,000]). Keep in mind that as the
security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false rejection.

Duress: set a fingerprint template to be used as a duress finger (the duress finger will
activate alarms when used to gain entry).
5.4.3
Face Tab
The Face tab allows you to specify a FaceStation device to use for storing face templates
of users. When you sucessfully capture faces(up to 5 per user), the FaceStation device
transfers 25 face templates to the BioStar. During authentication, any face template that
receives a higher score than one of the registered face templates will replace the old one.
For more information about capturing face images, see section 3.6.3.

Enroll Device: Select a device to use for capturing face images.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
300
5. Customize Settings
5.4.4
Card Tab
The Card tab allows you to specify card types and IDs and issue cards to users. For more
information about issuing cards, see section 3.6.4.

Card Type: Select a type of access card to issue (Mifare CSN, Mifare Template, EM
4100, HID Prox, iCLASS CSN, or iCLASS Template).

Card ID: Displays the card ID number when a card is issued.

Custom ID: Enter a custom ID for the card.
5.4.5
T&A Tab
The T&A tab allows you to specify which shifts, holiday rules, and leave periods apply to a
user. To add new details, click Add at the bottom of the tab. To save changes to time and
attendance settings, you must click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also remove
entries by highlighting the entry and clicking Delete. For more information about
configuring time and attendance, please see section 3.9.

Shift Management: Specify which shifts apply to the user.

Holiday Rules Management: Specify which holiday rules apply to the user.

Leave Management: Specify leave for the user.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
301
06

Technical Support
If you have any questions regarding this document or BioStar software, please contact technical
support at [email protected]
Please provide the following information for prompt and easy assistance:

Contact information and available times

Version of BioStar and device model name (e.g. BioStar 1.92, BioStation 2)

Error messages and description on problems
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
302
07

Open Licenses
AES
FIPS-197 compliant AES implementation Copyright (C) 2006-2007 Christophe Devine
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License,
version 2.1 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
The AES block cipher was designed by Vincent Rijmen and Joan Daemen.
http://csrc.nist.gov/encryption/aes/rijndael/Rijndael.pdf
http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips197/fips-197.pdf
MD5
MD5C.C - RSA Data Security, Inc., MD5 message-digest algorithm
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 MessageDigest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA
Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of
this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
OpenSSL
LICENSE ISSUES
===========
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay
license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues
related to OpenSSL please contact [email protected]
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
303
7. Open Licenses


---------------------====================================================================
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected]
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior
written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
====================================================================
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------------Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following
conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL
documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
304
7. Open Licenses


The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this
code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
SHA-256
FIPS-180-2 compliant SHA-256 implementation
Copyright (C) 2006-2007 Christophe Devine
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License,
version 2.1 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
The SHA-256 Secure Hash Standard was published by NIST in 2002.
http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips180-2/fips180-2.pdf
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
305
index
Glossary
access card: A card that can be used to grant or restrict access to a specific area. BioStar supports
MIFARE® , EM4100, HID proximity, iCLASS® , and FeliCa® cards. See also: proximity card.
access control system: A system of physical mechanisms and controls that permit or deny access to
a particular resource or physical area. BioStar is an IP-based biometric access control system.
alarm zone: A grouping of devices that is used to protect a physical area. BioStar monitors input
points in an alarm zone and triggers alarms when intrusion or tampering is detected.
anti-passback: A security protocol that prevents a user from providing unauthorized entrance to
another user via an access card or fingerprint. See also: timed anti-passback.
biometrics: Biometrics refers to the use of physical characteristics for verification or authorization.
BioStar incorporates Suprema’s award-winning fingerprint recognition technology to provide
biometric authentication of a user's identity and authorization to gain access to restricted areas.
bypass group: A group of users that can bypass normal restrictions for a zone.
client: BioStar client software allows an operator to connect remotely to the BioStar server and
control connected devices. An operator ID and password are required to access the system via a
client.
department: A division of an organization used to group employees. The use of departments is not
necessary, but may be helpful to organize large numbers of employees.
device: In this guide, the word "device" refers to any Suprema product supported by the BioStar
system. Supported devices include BioStation, BioStation Mifare, BioStation HID, DStation, BioEntry
Plus/BioEntry W, BioEntry Plus Mifare/BioEntry W Mifare, BioEntry Plus iCLASS, BioEntry Plus HID,
BioLite Net, Xpass, and BioMini USB terminals, as well as the Secure I/O device.
distributed intelligence: In the BioStar system, the authorization database is distributed to each
terminal, so that authorization is faster and can continue even when other parts of the system are
offline.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
306
Glossary
door: Doors are the physical barriers that provide entry into a building or space. At least one device
must be connected to a door to provide access control, but two devices can be connected to support
anti-passback and other features, such as door relays, alarm relays, exit switches, and sensors.
duress finger: This term refers to an enrolled fingerprint that will activate silent alerts when a
candidate is under duress. In the typical duress scenario, a perpetrator forces the candidate to gain
access by force or threat of harm. The candidate gains access by means of his or her "duress finger,"
which allows access and simultaneously triggers the alarm or alert actions you specify.
enrollment: The process of creating a user account and capturing images of fingerprints or issuing
access cards.
entrance limit: The maximum number of times a user can gain authorization to a specific area. The
entrance limit can be related to a time period so that users are limited to certain number of entries
during office hours, for example.
ESSID: Extended Service Set ID. The ESSID is the name of a wireless network access point. It allows
one wireless network to be clearly distinguishable from another. ESSID is one type of SSID (the other
being BSSID).
face recognition -The automated process of validating a claimed identity based on the image of a
face. BioStar extracts and analyzes the facial features such as the skin texture and the shapes of the
face, eyes, nose and mouth from a captured face image and compares them with those of all the
registered persons.
false acceptance rate: The false acceptance rate (FAR) is a measure of the likelihood that a biometric
security system will incorrectly accept an access attempt by an unauthorized user. A system's FAR
typically is stated as the ratio of the number of false acceptances to the number of identification
attempts.
false rejection rate: The false rejection rate (FRR) is a measure of the likelihood that a biometric
security system will incorrectly reject an access attempt by an authorized user. A system's FRR is
typically stated as the ratio of the number of false rejections to the number of identification attempts.
fingerprint recognition -The automated process of matching two human fingerprints: one previously
recorded and one being provided by a user for authentication. BioStar incorporates Suprema's
award-winning algorithms for recognizing fingerprints.
fingerprint sensor: A fingerprint sensor is an electronic device used to capture a digital image of the
fingerprint pattern. The captured image is called a live scan. This live scan is digitally processed to
create a biometric template (a collection of extracted features) which is stored and used for
fingerprint recognition.
fire alarm zone: A zone that is used to interface with fire alarms and control doors when a fire is
detected.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
307
Glossary
host: A host is the device that serves as the master in a RS485 network. The host device relays data
packets between external devices (or a larger network) and slave devices connected to the RS485
network.
input signal: The signal sent to a device by an external object, such as an exit button.
operator: Operators are personnel who have rights to use BioStar clients. BioStar includes three predefined classes for operators: administrators, operators, and managers. BioStar also supports a
maximum of 16 custom operator classes.
output signal: The signal sent to an external device, such as an alarm siren or electronic door strike.
proximity card: Proximity cards (or "prox" cards) are contactless integrated circuit devices used for
security access. BioStation, BioEntry Plus, and BioLite Net devices support EM4100 cards; BioStation
Mifare, BioEntry Plus Mifare, BioEntry W Mifare and BioLite Net, and DStation devices support
MIFARE and iCLASS cards; and BioStation HID and BioEntry Plus HID devices support HID proximity
cards.
RF device: Short-range radio frequency devices used to gain access to doors. The BioStar system
allows 3rd party RF devices to be added to the system to incorporate existing hardware into the
access control configuration
security level: see: false acceptance rate.
time and attendance (T&A): This designation refers to the processes and functions that monitor and
report check-in and check-out activities by employees and allow administrators to define time slots
and schedules. The information collected by the BioStar system can be used in conjunction with
external systems for time reporting and payroll capabilities.
timed anti-passback: A security protocol that prevents reauthorization of a user for a specified period
of time. See also: anti-passback.
timezone: A customizable schedule that can be used to allow or restrict access during specified
hours. Timezones can combined with doors to create access groups.
user: A user is any person who has access rights. A user's access rights are comprised of individual
rights (user level), membership in access groups, and time restrictions.
Wiegand interface: The Wiegand interface is a wiring standard used to connect a card swipe
mechanism to the rest of an electronic entry system. The interface uses three wires, one of which is a
common ground and two of which are data transmission wires usually called DATA0 and DATA1, but
sometimes also labeled Data High and Data Low.
zone: A zone consists of two or more devices that are grouped together. BioStar includes seven types
of zone classifications.
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
308
Index
anti-passback zone
A
Access Group tab, 286
Alarm tab, 285
Details tab, 285
access cards
issuing, 83
Access Control tab
B
BioEntry Plus, 168
BioEntry W, 168
BioEntry W2, 277
BioLite Net, 179
BioStation, 155
BioStation 2, 248
BioStation A2, 258
BioStation L2, 268
BioStation T2, 221
FaceStation, 235
Xpass, 189
Xpass S2, 197
X-Station, 207
BioEntry Plus
configuring, 45
overview, 11
BioEntry W
overview, 11
BioLite Net
configuring, 46
overview, 11
BioMini
overview, 12
BioMini Plus
access groups
adding, 99
adding users, 100
assigning to users, 100
selecting, 75
transferring to devices, 101
access zone
Details tab, 292
administrative account
adding, 34
changing level or password, 35
overview, 12
BioStar Server
configuring, 25, 26
BioStation
configuring, 43
connecting via wireless LAN, 41
overview, 11
BioStation 2
overview, 10
BioStation A2
overview, 10
alarm zone
Access Group tab, 290
Alarm tab, 289
Details tab, 288
BioStation L2
overview, 10
BioStation T2
configuring, 51
alarms
activation events, 158, 210, 224, 238
adding custom sounds, 112
configuring actions, 72
configuring settings and sounds, 111
customizing actions, 111
deactivation events, 158, 210, 225, 239
priority, 158, 210, 225, 238
releasing, 133
BioStation T2
overview, 11
Black list tab
BioEntry Plus, 171
BioEntry Plus W, 171
BioStation, 159, 182
X-Station, 211
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
309
Index
Black list tab
DESFire layout
BioStation T2, 225
editing, 90
Black list tab
Device pane, 45, 46, 48
BioStation 2, 249
devices
Black list tab
BioStation A2, 260
Black list tab
BioStation L2, 269
Black list tab
BioEntry W2, 278
Blacklist tab
Xpass, 192
C
Camera tab
X-Station, 205
Camera tab
BioStation T2, 219
Camera tab
FaceStation, 232
Camera tab
BioStation A2, 257
card ID format, 165, 187, 196
client list, 27
Command Card tab
BioEntry Plus, 172
BioEntry W, 172
Xpass, 192
Xpass S2, 201
adding, 37
adding RF devices, 40
adding slave devices, 39
creating a direct connection, 39
creating a server connection, 39
customize BioEntry W2 settings, 273
customize BioStation 2 settings, 243
customize BioStation A2 settings, 253
customize BioStation L2 settings, 263
customizing BioEntry Plus settings, 163
customizing BioEntry W settings, 163
customizing BioLite Net settings, 174
customizing BioStation settings, 150
customizing BioStation T2 settings, 215
customizing FaceStation settings, 229
customizing Xpass S2 settings, 195
customizing Xpass settings, 186
customizing X-Station settings, 203
DHCP, 39
downgrading, 148
locking or unlocking, 133
removing, 147
resetting locks, 135
setting automatic locking, 134
static IP, 39
upgrading firmware, 147
Display/Sound tab
command cards
deleting all users, 137
deleting an individual user, 136
enrolling users, 81
issuing, 46, 49
connection type, 37
BioEntry W2, 279
BioLite Net, 183
BioStation 2, 249
BioStation A2, 260
BioStation L2, 270
BioStation T2, 226
FaceStation, 239
X-Station, 212
Display/Sound tab
D
databases
creating, 24
mapping imported data, 140
migrating from BioAdmin, 32
BioEntry Plus, 172
BioEntry W, 172
BioStation, 160
Display/Sound tab
Xpass, 193
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
310
Index
Display/Sound tab
FeliCa cards, 83
Xpass S2, 202
Fingerprint tab
BioEntry Plus, 166
BioEntry W, 166
BioEntry W2, 275
BioLite Net, 176
BioStation, 153
BioStation 2, 245
BioStation A2, 255
BioStation L2, 266
BioStation T2, 218
FaceStation, 232
doors
adding, 63
Alarm tab, 284
associating with devices, 63
configuring, 64
creating door groups, 65
Details tab, 281
opening and closing, 133
Double Mode, 152, 205, 217, 231
E
fingerprints
activating encryption, 148
changing template, 149
image quality, 153
registering, 79, 81
security level, 153, 219, 232, 246, 256, 266,
275
sensitivity, 153, 219, 232, 246, 256, 266,
275
sensor placement, 79
server matching, 154, 166, 177
EM4100 cards, 84
email notifications, 112
entrance limit setting, 156, 207, 208, 222,
235, 236, 248
entrance limit zone
Access Group tab, 288
Alarm tab, 287
Details tab, 287
event logs
viewing from the monitoring pane, 127, 128
fire alarm zone
Alarm tab, 291
Details tab, 290
event views
changing, 31, 32
H
events
real-time monitoring, 122
uploading logs to BioStar, 126
viewing logs, 125
viewing logs in panes, 126
HID proximity cards, 85
holiday schedules, 97
host device
adding, 40
external devices
configuring inputs, 116
configuring outputs, 115
I
iClass CSN cards, 86
F
iClass layout
face image
capture, 81
FaceStation
configuring, 53
FaceStation
overview, 11
editing, 92
Input tab
BioEntry Plus, 169
BioEntry W, 169
BioEntry W2, 277
BioLite Net, 180
BioStation, 156
BioStation 2, 248
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
311
Index
BioStation A2, 258
BioStation L2, 268
BioStation T2, 223
FaceStation, 237
Xpass, 190
Xpass S2, 198
X-Station, 209
N
Network tab
BioEntry Plus, 166
BioEntry W, 166
BioLite Net, 178
BioStation, 154
BioStation 2, 246
BioStation A2, 257
BioStation L2, 267, 276
BioStation T2, 220
FaceStation, 233
Xpass, 188
Xpass S2, 196
X-Station, 206
installation
BioStar Client, 27
BioStar Express, 21
BioStar server, 23
interlock zone
Details tab, 294
Interphone tab
networking
BioStation 2, 248
BioStation T2, 222
FaceStation, 235
RS232 settings, 155, 221, 234
RS485 settings, 155, 207, 221, 234, 247,
258, 268, 277
server settings, 155, 207, 221, 234, 247,
258, 267, 276
TCP/IP settings, 154, 206, 220, 233, 247,
257, 258, 267, 276
USB settings, 155
L
Lift I/O
overview, 12
lifts
adding, 65
adding users, 67
associating with devices, 65
configuring, 66
setup, 65
logging in to BioStar, 29
O
operation mode
1 to 1, 151, 204
1 to N, 152
server matching, 187, 196, 205
M
Operation mode tab
MIFARE / DESFire CSN cards, 86
Operation Mode tab
X-Station, 204
MIFARE layout
editing, 89
MIFARE template cards, 87
monitoring, 122
muster zone
Access Group tab, 294
Details tab, 292
roll call, 124
BioEntry Plus, 163
BioEntry W, 163
BioEntry W2, 273
BioLite Net, 174
BioStation, 151
BioStation 2, 243
BioStation A2, 253
BioStation L2, 263
BioStation T2, 216
FaceStation T2, 229
Xpass, 186
Xpass S2, 195
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
312
Index
Output tab
time and attendance
BioEntry Plus, 170
BioEntry W, 170
BioLite Net, 181
BioStation, 157
BioStation T2, 224
FaceStation, 238
Xpass, 191
Xpass S2, 200
X-Station, 210
adding a daily schedule, 103
adding a shift, 106
adding a time category, 102
generating T&A reports, 142
modifying T&A reports, 145
monitoring T&A status via the IO Board, 141
overview, 17
printing or exporting T&A report data, 146
Timezone pane, 96
timezones
S
adding holidays, 97
creating, 96
Secure I/O
overview, 12
toolbar, 31
Secure I/O 2
overview, 10
U
Server Settings, 155, 207, 221, 234, 247,
258, 267, 276
users
adding new information fields, 136, 137,
138
Card tab, 298
creating accounts, 76
customizing information fields, 138
deleting, 136
deleting all via command cards, 137
deleting an individual via command cards,
136
Details tab, 295
enrolling via command cards, 81
exporting data, 139
Face tab, 297
Fingerprints tab, 297
importing data, 140
merge user data imported from the device,
94
modifying information fields, 139
registering fingerprints, 78
retrieving data from device, 93
synchronize all, 93
T&A tab, 298
transfer to device, 92
transferring to other departments, 138
site keys
changing, 88
support, 299
system requirements, 20
T
T&A mode
BioEntry Plus, 168
BioEntry W2, 280
BioLite Net, 184
BioStation 2, 251
BioStation A2, 261
BioStation L2, 271
D-Station, 227, 241
Xpass, 189, 198
X-Station, 213
T&A tab
BioEntry W2, 280
BioLite Net, 184
BioStation, 161
BioStation 2, 251
BioStation A2, 261
BioStation L2, 271
BioStation T2, 227
FaceStation, 241
X-Station, 213
V
visual map
creating, 129
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
313
Index
monitoring doors, 130
X
Xpass
W
configuring, 48
overview, 12
Wiegand format
26-bit, 60
custom, 61
pass-through, 61
Xpass S2
overview, 12
Wiegand mode, 162, 229, 242, 252, 263,
272, 281
X-Station
configuring, 49
overview, 12
Wiegand tab
BioEntry Plus, 173
BioEntry W, 173
BioEntry W2, 280
BioLite Net, 185
BioStation, 162
BioStation 2, 252
BioStation A2, 262
BioStation L2, 272
BioStation T2, 229
FaceStation, 242
Xpass, 194
Xpass S2, 203
X-Station, 215
Z
zones
adding, 70
adding devices, 70
bypassing restrictions, 75
configuring alarm actions, 72
configuring arm and disarm settings, 73
configuring external input/output settings,
74
configuring inputs, 72
types, 68
viewing events, 75
Copyright © 2015, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
314
Suprema Inc.
16F Parkview Office Tower, Jeongja, Bundang, Seongnam, Gyeonggi,
463-863 Korea
Tel: +82-31-783-4502
Fax: +82-31-783-4503
Email: [email protected]
Homepage: www.supremainc.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement